Home

KYOCERA FS FS-3540MFP

1. 9 13 vigo EE 9 14 F AV ORMC SHAD DIC AUOMN MER RERRRRREDER 9 15 inci peut A 9 15 ul 9 16 SUC MEMO EEE EE EEE EEEE EE EEEE M 9 17 Bul t RRRRERPHRR E A B5 nS 9 22 Adjustment Maintenance essessssesseeseeee nennen enne nnn nnne sn nena sa sanas asas nns 9 23 User Login Administration 9 25 First User Login Administration seeeseesssesseesseenneennenne nnne 9 25 User Login OUND E m ap D E Taai 9 26 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration cccccceccceeeceeeceeeceeeseeeeseeeseeeees 9 27 AANO ISEN ME P 9 29 Local User Authorization ccccccecccecccececeeeeeeeceuceceeeceueceueceaeeseesueeseeessuessaeeseees 9 33 INN VON e c 9 34 Editing and Deleting Users cccccccccscccsecceeeceececeeeceeeseeeecaeceaeeeeeeesueesaeesenesaueesaeens 9 35 SITING ELO sans ete t E A E 9 38 Group AUIMONIZAUOMN ess cesievect daervevcoesstopevsenscvecsmetdetaressseuseeeaeseeiceunedeasesueedcecansoseageesnset 9 44 Obtain Network User Property cccccccccceecceeeeseeeeeeeseeeceeeseeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeeaes 9 48 SOD ACCOUN MM
2. I 7 14 1 1 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer The following file types can be printed e PDF file Version 1 5 e TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format e JPEG file e XPS file e Encrypted PDF file PDF files you wish to print should have an extension pdf Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used Wy Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot When the message Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files Are you sure is displayed press Yes Q IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 12 N 1 2 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 2 Display the screen 10 10 10 10 El 11 3 3 3PG J X 7 9 22PG 1 1 gt 1 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory
3. ETE 3 39 Continuous SCAN ee 3 41 Papar SOIC CU OU ennaa Ear a aeea 3 43 soc 3 44 Bc A 9 nOOO X n 3 45 Scan IRC SOMO ENERO RT 3 46 OIG INAV ENERO HERRERA 3 47 v0 eee EEE ae eee ee er oer 3 48 Background Density Adjust ccccccccccecceeeceeeeeeeceeeese esse eeeee nennen nnne nnne nnns 3 49 co scents c 3 50 mise TNR 3 51 GOl ercie m 3 53 JOD Finish NOUCO MERC 3 54 missas TT 3 56 miles OV uil m E 3 57 4 1 BoE OPTATO sarr AE E O A 4 2 OS FUNCIONS eeann aE E EENE EEE E 4 4 LOON aar ee EE EEEE EE P 4 5 Blei reer a A E E A 4 7 Seng qfe U 4 10 BO FV 4 13 5 1 Printing rom zio PING AUIOINS MR TREE T m 5 2 Printing Data Saved on the Printer ccccccccccceeccseeeceeeceeeeseeeseeseeeseeeeseeeseeeeaeesseeeseeeeaeeeaes 5 5 qi ru AI Ge ice 5 5 POO NORIO sesona irer EAE EE S 5 7 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents cccc ce
4. Menu GB0056 00 Add Close GB0779 00 3 19 Common Operations gt Favorites NOTE Press Application to display the Application screen You can install applications that enable your daily work to be accomplished more efficiently For the applications see Favorites Application on page 9 15 Select the function 10 10 E 57 E 27 E V ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre ss Entry 1 1 Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A Scan to E mail A ss Book ddress Entry ddress Book GB0056_00 3 Select the job type 10 10 10 10 e e Sj e EI EE gt g Cancel lt Back Next gt LISSE Es daB s 9 Qo When you select the wizard mode Ext Address Book gt _ Original Size A 1 2 ph f 1 6 One Touch Key gt m Original Orientation Top Edge on Left Address Entry E mail ca v __ Duplex 1 sided VY GB0767 00 GB0769 00 EST Bag Razi gt Razi Select the function Checked items will be shown as part of the wizard NOTE When the job type is Copy the Destination Recall Method screen will not be displayed Use or os to scroll up and down 4 Enter a name Sending Job E mail Input 20 1 Limit 32 GB0057 80 Lens T s Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 3 20 Common Operations gt Favorites 5 Check the settings Check the settings and change or ad
5. Print Printer Name Properties 2 Status m Type Document and Markups VI Print Range Preview Composite All K 210 02 3J Current view Current pag Pages 1 Subset All pages in rang Reverse pages Page Handling Copies 1 Collate 297 01 Page Scaling Shrink to Printable Area nS v Auto Rotate and Center Choose paper source by PDF page size Use custom paper size when needed Units mm Zoom 96 Print to file 1 1 y aD Coma 1 Select the printer 2 Click Properties button 0 2 Printing gt Printing from Applications Properties Quick Pr p Basic m yout Publishine Paper 3 Portrait O Landscape E Rotated E Collate T Frint preview 4x KYOCERA Profiles 3 Select the Basic tab ZE Flip on short edge Quality T EcoPrint Eco Media type Unspecified Destination Printer default C Print on both sides Flip on long edge 4 Click Page Sizes button to select the paper size To print on the special paper such as recycled paper click the Media Type menu and select the media type 5 Click Source and select the paper source NOTE If you choose Auto Select papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type To print on special paper such as envelope or labels place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray 6 Sel
6. 8 11 iie qe Bremer 8 12 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper ssesssesssesssssssseseseeeeneee eene nnn nnns 8 14 8 1 Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status E Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs and Scheduled Jobs The following job statuses are available Print Job Status Copy E mail reception Printer Job Report List Printing from Document Box Printing data from removable memory FAX reception Application Send Job Status FAX transmission Application Folder SMB FTP transmission Mixed Multiple destination E mail Store Job Status Scan Printer FAX Scheduled Job Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status J O b Ca n cel lee Job Status 2 gt 1 le Job Status Bs Job Status 1 4 Scheduled Job Print Jobs Press either of Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status or Scheduled Job to check the status lt GB0052_00 2 Check the status 10 10 0089 doc0000892010092514 e 5 23
7. 2 in 1 Copies 2 originals onto each page 4 in 1 Copies 4 originals onto each page Other Combine 2 in 1 L to R T to B Copies 2 originals onto each page Settings 2 in 1 R to L B to T 4 in 1 Right then Down Copies 4 originals onto each page 4 in 1 Left then Down Border Line Sets the boundary line type to a solid line dotted line or positioning mark Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction NOTE Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A4 A5 B5 Folio Letter Legal Statement Oficio Il and 16K When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 10 Copying gt Copying Functions 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 a R Zoom H H Density Normal 0 Paper Selection 1 sided 1 sided GB0001 01 2 Select the function 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 Ready to copy 10 10 gt Others S C L7 NM E 9 Others 1 Ready to copy 10 10 Ge eg 2in1 4in1 Others C L7 NEN e 2 Select the desired Combine option 10 10 10 10 Combine 2 Ye 2in 1 Lto R T to B GB0016 00 i SE 2in1 RtoL B to T 2 4in1 Right then Down
8. There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply When paper is exhausted the pointer will go down to the level of LI empty 3 6 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement and 16K Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper Q IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Quick Setup Wizard on page 3 31 The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows e A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 100 sheets e Hagaki 1 sheet e OHP film 1 sheet Envelope 5 sheets NOTE When you load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Paper Size on page 9 8 When you use special paper such as transparencies select the media type by referring to Media Type on page 9 8 4 Adjust the multi purpose tray size 1 Io i Wie Bes lAs J uu Lu Duo il nr gt e z I we y 5 N f 3 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 2 Load
9. 7 12 APS PILO PAJO eee TI ee eee eee eee eee eee 7 13 LONG ey 4 MEER ee ee EA Pe mene nee ee enn eee nee er ee eee 7 14 Status JOD Cancel sssinseiwisnescccacsansstesanewsesacsawsewennesanceventernwansesaeseresiarvanees 8 1 GPECKINOJOD NAUS E E EEEE E E ETE 8 2 Details of the Status Screens ccc ccccecccsccscccececeueceuceceeeceeecsueceueecaeecsueeseeseueessenenans 8 3 CHECKING JOD HISTON A P 8 7 Sending the Log HISTOTY ES 8 8 Setting the Destination 8 9 Automatic Log History Transmission sess 8 10 Manual Log History Transmission esses 8 10 Seting E mail UDI e TEM 8 11 ecedodBrVe iciqeu 8 12 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper cccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeees 8 14 Setup Registration and User Management 9 1 eric ge c sees 9 2 Operation Method m E 9 2 user 9 3 Wigs M R 9 5 i51 evt natoian 9 5 User TOD OV seca RET 9 7 Cassette MP Tray Settings ccccccccccccescccseeeeeeeeseecesea cess eeeeeesseeesseeeeseeeesaeesseeeees 9 7 OI age pec WING i RETRO 9 9 0
10. Steps Rule Type Does this rule apply to TCP or UDP Protocol and Ports 1 Action wet Profile Name Does this rule apply to all local ports or specific local ports Specific local ports 139 Example 80 443 5000 5010 Leam more about protocol and ports 3 Select Specific local ports and enter 139 7 E New Inbound Rule Wizard Action Specify the action to be taken when a connection matches the conditions specified in the rule Steps Rule Type What action should be taken when a connection matches the specified conditions Protocol and Ports Allow the connection Action This includes connections that are protected with IPsec as well as those are not Profile WO Allow tne connection If it Is secure Name This includes only connections that have been authenticated by using IPsec Connections will be secured using the settings in Psec properties and rules in the Connection Security Rule node D Block the connection Leam more about actions 2 F New Inbound Rule Wizard Profile Specify the profiles for which this rule applies Steps Rule Type When does this rule apply Protocol and Ports Action V Domain Profile Applies when a computer is connected to its corporate domain Name V Private Applies when a computer is connected to a private network location 7 Public Applies when a computer
11. lt Back Press to return to the previous screen OK Next gt Press to save the entered characters and move to the next screen Appendix gt Character Entry Method Upper case Letter Entry Screen AB Input Limit 32 GB0057 E02 Number Symbol Entry Screen o Input 3 s 123 Limit 32 GB0057 E03 Display Key Description A V To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter Appendix gt Character Entry Method Entering Characters Follow the steps below to enter List A 1 for an example 4 Enter List space ro ABC raaka Baar a Input Limit 32 a GB0057_E11 GB0057_E12 To shift from lower case to upper case letters press a A To shift from upper case to lower case letters press A a 2 Enter A 1 INGEN 2 Temm es NORUNT SEAT EIC NES ES boa eh x DIA List A i Limit 32 i deed z ABC Aa EN GB0057 E13 GB0057 E14 To enter numbers or symbols press ABC to display Symbol 3 Register the characters you entered List A 1 a E Sm GB0057_E14 Press Next gt The entered characters are registered Appendix gt Paper Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source Cassettes Supported types Pla
12. 3 Install Printer Driver AOC Install Pe biah B o ERR Welcome to the Bi i SRAM 2 8 AT Installer Introduction Read Me You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software Destination Select llation Type tli Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software This completes the printer driver installation Next specify the print settings If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used the settings below are required If a USB connection is used the machine is automatically recognized and connected Preparation before Use gt Installing Software 4 Configure the printer 1 Display the window ne Print amp Fax A a ShowAll ann System Preferences Q s Printers Personal zx Adobe PDF 7 0 C ua m Bg uU e i Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp Language amp Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Text CU Options amp Supplies Hardware 3 3 S Location b m ET emm X Kind Adobe PDF J 3016 102 CDs amp DVDs Displays pied Keyboard Mouse Print amp Fax Sound Stabe Paced Internet amp Wireless 1 2 6 0 a MobileMe Network Bluetooth Sharing vi Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences System y E Default printer Last Printer Used 4 t L j t d 1 Aa Nee dy e e Default paper size A4 4 Accounts Date amp Time Parental Softwar
13. ccccccccccseccseceseecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseueeeeeeseeeaeeeses 3 12 Loading Originals in the Document Processor ccceccceecceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeas 3 13 Checking the Equipment s Serial Number sseeessessssssssenenen nennen nnns 3 15 CTO CIS ME OUI OI ise cites ES 3 16 EGOIN OO serene E yon e E 3 17 Woo e r 3 17 Boos T E 3 18 Copying Printing FA OMI CREEK 3 19 Registering Favorites ccceccceccceecceecceeeeeeeceececaeecauecaueesaeecaeecueceueesaeesseesaeessueesaeeses 3 19 Editing and Deleting Favorites ccc ccccccccceccceeeceeeceeeeseeeseueceeeseeeeseeeseeeseneeseeeseeeee 3 23 Using AV ONC Se ERR ER REED 3 25 SPORCU dq T o 3 27 Registering gro gto DICEN RR anaa aeaiia 3 27 Editing and Deleting Shortcuts cece ccccccececececeseceececeeecaeeceeeeeueeseeeseeesaseeseeesagees 3 29 SIC MON UNS ede RETRO E E EEEE EARO 3 30 Ou ick SOU cA Irem TEEE 3 31 mci ele Qc 2 NENNT TEE 3 33 amp negomolq 3 34 Using a I iures Malleio MAREE 3 35 Common F nctionally M 3 36 B dfe gro ZS ERREUR ETT 3 37 S uel aziESi us 3 38 Bol d
14. sssseessessessseseeereenennee 6 24 PRO GINO E Gonzo ENTM TO 6 24 PRONG OUD eiee I 6 28 Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries ccccccccccccececeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeessneeseeeeas 6 31 Adding a Destination on One Touch Key sessessssssssesssenneennnne nennen nnne nnns 6 33 Adding a Destinati sds coerce ces rs a Ea S aE 6 33 Editing and Deleting One Touch Key cece cecccceccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseueeaeeeaes 6 35 Sendo FUNCIONS PNE ERT m 6 36 SENANG SIZE NER mm 6 37 Fo ona O a E EEE E a EE 6 39 zn srren e EE E ENEN EEA 6 40 RL EMG OOO TA erien EE EEEE E EEEE E EEEE 6 41 Wo eie A E 6 42 Scanning USING TWAIN M Y 6 45 Docurmenb BOX sscnnceee acumen estecenerenacenacenessusannusrsceencnespetacsternupuwsnneseescosanenestee 7 1 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 7 2 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB cc eccecceecceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 7 5 Removing USB Memory A 7 8 Functions for Document BOX 22e iuris o exec trh iranran ERO REST paupe du kt bem pea MEO UNUS Gps Mea ME dE tU us 7 9 BUogJq 7 10 Encrypted PDF Password 7 11 GA FTI EMNRM
15. FTP Encrypted TX page 6 47 FAX Delayed Transmission refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Direct Transmission refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Polling RX refer to Fax Operation Guide Add Edit Shortcut page 3 27 Xi Document Job Box page 5 5 Box v Removable Menu Store File File Format page 3 51 Memory s Duplex page 3 39 Scan Resolution page 3 46 Density page 3 45 File Name Entry page 3 56 Functions Original Size page 3 37 Original Orientation page 3 38 Storing Size page 7 14 Color Selection page 3 53 Original Image page 3 47 Sharpness page 3 48 Background Density Adj page 3 49 Zoom page 3 50 Continuous Scan page 3 41 Job Finish Notice page 3 54 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 27 Print Copies page 7 3 Paper Selection page 3 43 Collate page 3 44 Duplex page 7 10 Functions Job Finish Notice page 3 54 Priority Override page 3 57 Encrypted PDF Password page 7 11 JPEG TIFF Print page 7 12 XPS Fit to Page page 7 13 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 27 Sub Address Box refer to Fax Operation Guide Polling Box refer to Fax Operation Guide xii Status Print Job Status page 8 3 Job Send Job Status page 8 4 Store Job Status page 8 5 Scheduled Job page 8 6 Print Job Lo
16. GB0437_00 GB0438_00 d Enter the host name 10 10 2 Input 3 Limit 64 Server Type Kerberos Domain Name 1 GB0437_00 GB0057 24 d Up to 64 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters x 9 27 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Enter a domain name System Menu Counter 10 10 2 Server Type Kerberos Host Name abc 1 Domain Name Input 3 Limit 256 e GB0437 02 GB0057 25 When selecting NTLM or Kerberos as the server type enter a domain name of 256 characters or less Enter the port number 10 10 10 10 Server Type 1 65535 Host Name 2 When selecting Ext as the server type enter the port number Port C2 GB0437 01 GB0439 00 a t Press Save 10 10 Server Type Ext Host Name abc Port 9093 GB0437 01 Cancel NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings Network Authentication setting of the machine User property of the Authentication Server Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized 9 2
17. GB0435 01 GB0691 00 7 NEP l Siu Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Configure the function Server Name 10 10 Input 3 2 i Limit 64 389 1 i Name 1 displayName Up to 64 characters can be entered GB0692_00 GB0057_34 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 9 48 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Port System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 mE EE m Server Name 1 65535 Port Name 1 displayName 3 Cancel OK m GB0692 02 GB0439 01 Name 1 and Name 2 System Menu Counter 10 10 Input 11 Limit 32 GB0692_02 GB0057 35 Up to 32 characters can be entered E mail Address 10 10 esu i Input 4 Limit 128 E mail Address mail AN Y Search Timeout Pese GB0692 01 GB0057 36 Up to 128 characters can be entered Search Timeout 10 10 10 10 5 255 GB0692 01 GB0693 00 Cancel t 3 Press OK 9 49 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability of up to 100 individual accounts e Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits between 0 and 9
18. 1 999 2 Cancel 0 4 d opecify the number of copies to print as desired When using the number of copies specified with print job select GB0003 00 Upon completion of printing the Private Print job is automatically deleted To delete Document Box 10 10 _ Sjdoc 0100908134821 1 1 T GB0653 01 Select the document you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE The password entry screen will be displayed Enter the password using the numeric keys 5 6 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Proof and Hold Proof and Hold stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Proof and Hold Print job Refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver NOTE RAM disk mode must be enabled For details refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9 22 Y Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the RAM disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs 4 Display the screen 10 10 lt gt System Menu Counter E 3 Send gt Em System Menu Counter 10 10 5i Favorites l n 1 1 o Box System Menu Counter a Copy Job Retention a Deletion of Job Retention 1 Sub Address Box GB0054 02 LA 10 10 GB0290 00 GB0310 00 2 Enter the maximum number
19. 10 10 GB0222 01 Cancel Canceling will be displayed and the current job will be canceled When there is a job printing or on standby Ms 10 10 0095 E1doc0000952010092810 1 3 GB0717 00 2 Displays details for individual jobs Menu Select the job you wish to cancel and press Delete NOTE The current print job is temporarily interrupted Continues without temporarily interrupting jobs being sent You can also cancel executing jobs and jobs on standby after checking their status Refer to Status Job Cancel on page 8 1 Canceling printing from a computer To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing do the following 1 Double click the printer icon i amp wJ displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer 2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select Cancel from the Document menu 3 34 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Using Various Functions This section describes common functionality that can be configured for copying sending and the document box 1 Display the screen Co py Press the key of each function When using USB memory plug it into the USB memory slot Press Yes on the displayed screen When printing from USB memory select the file to be printed and press Print When storing a document to USB memory select the fold
20. 300x300dni ha Density E mail Folder FAX V Um Normal 0 Vv Close Ad fedi 1 Favorites Shortcut j GB0055 00 GB0081 01 Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Adjust density GB0008 00 a o Press 3 to 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density 3 45 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution The selectable resolution is 200 x 100dpi 200 x 200dpi Fine 200 x 400dpi Super 300 x 300dpi 400 x 400dpi Ultra or 600 x 600dpi NOTE The larger the number the better the image resolution However better resolution also means larger file sizes and longer send times 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen Send 10 10 Det Recall Cre S One Touch One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book n ent 1 2 es oo lw E mail _ Folder FAX xv Favorites Scan to USB 10 10 M HNNNENNNNNN I MEE pe nat LO il pe Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi a hl AY ED pensi ab abes Normal 0 doc Cancel GB0096 00 2 Select the resolution Ready to send 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra FI 200x200dpi Fine 300x300dpi Fi 200x100dpi Normal FI 200x400dpi Super ON 7C 1j GB0085 00 3 46 n Ready to send CX Sending Size Same as Original Size KM File Separatio
21. Cancel 2 Select the desired Duplex option Ready to copy 3 Select the binding edge of the originals Ready to copy 10 10 Duplex 1 sided 1 sided co Wa g 10 10 2 sided gt gt 2 sided GB0009 00 GB0009 00 GB0010 00 GB0010 01 Ready to copy MC 1 sided gt gt 1 sided oO 1 sided gt gt 2 sided p 2 sided gt gt 1 sided Ut 2 sided 2 sided Cancel If you choose a 2 sided sheet proceed to Step 3 If you choose duplex proceed to Step 4 Ready to copy ma Left Right y Top NEP 10 10 1 1 10 10 t GB0024 00 GB0181 00 Copying gt Copying Functions 4 Select the binding edge of the finished copies Ready to copy 10 10 Duplex 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Binding in Original 1 Original Urlentation Left Right Top Edge on Left 5 Select the original orientation Ready to copy 10 10 Duplex 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Binding in Original Binding in Finishing Left Right Left Right Original Orientation Top Edge on Left Cancel 4 9 GB0010 01 GB0010 01 Ready to copy ma Left Right Y Top Ad Top Edge on Top Ea Top Edge on Left NE d eo o 1O o o a o GB0012 00 Copying gt Copying Functions Combine Combine 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 copied page You can select the page layout or the type of boundary lines around the pages
22. Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time 9 12 Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred 9 13 Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions 9 13 Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter 9 13 characters USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use 9 13 Copy Configures settings for copying functions 9 13 Send Configures settings for sending functions 9 14 Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box and Sub Address Box For details on Job Box refer to Printing on page 5 1 and for details on Sub Address Box refer to the Fax Operation Guide FAX Configures settings for fax functions Refer to the Fax Operation Guide Favorites Application You can install and use applications that will make your day to day use 9 15 of this machine more efficient Internet This procedure sets up the Internet browser application 9 15 Address Book One Touch Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings For details on Address Book refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 6 24 and for details on One Touch Key refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6 33 9 3 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu User Login Job Accounting Description Configures settings related to machine management For details o
23. 1 1 Cancel Pause All Close Print Jobs O Refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 8 3 Send Job Status screen on page 8 4 Store Job N Status screen on page 8 5 and Scheduled Job screen on page 8 6 GB0182 00 Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Details of the Status Screens Print Job Status Screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0089 FE doc0000892010092514 e GB0182 00 Cancel m Pause All Close Print Jobs Item Key Detail Icons that indicate the job type Copy job a Printer job Job from Document Box A FAX reception ma E mail reception Report List 4 Data from removable memory Application Cancel Select the job to be canceled from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Pause All Print Jobs Pauses all the printing jobs By pressing this key again the printing jobs will be resumed Status of job Cm Printing cl Printing priority override H Print Waiting Print Waiting priority override Pausing print job or error Canceling the job E The status before starting to print 9 The status before starting to print priority override Di Printing has been suspended due to priority override Close Closes the Print Job Status screen NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Status Job Cancel gt Ch
24. Limit 128 3 z2 r 9 Qo kz 7 j i i lt a EE 1 005005 c V b n m a m y rt lt c o D GB0057_99 2 Confirm the settings and start the job Use V or A to scroll up and down 10 10 Density Normal 0 GB0820 00 NOTE To edit the settings press lt Back and make changes as desired Common Operations gt Favorites When using the program mode Select a favorite to call up registered settings Press the Start key to start the job Start 3 26 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Shortcuts Frequently used function screens can be registered as shortcuts so that they can be called up easily Registering Shortcuts You can register up to 2 shortcuts for copying functions sending functions and functions set for document box The following types of shortcuts are available Private Shortcut Private shortcuts are only available for use by the logged in user They can only be set while using user login administration Shared Shortcut Shared shortcuts can be used by all machine users When using user login administration shared shortcuts can only be set by users who have logged in as administrators 1 Display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 ee 5 Original Size ks Paper N Zoom all Density oat A4 Selection poe T Orginal Orientation A40 100 Normal 0 Top Edge on Left a
25. Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine Value TIFF V6 TTN2 Default Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key Value Destination Address Book Ext Address Book One Touch Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Favorites Application You can install and use applications that will make your day to day use of this machine more efficient Please contact your dealer or service representative information on applications Default Screen Description Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Favorites Application key Value Favorites Application Application 1 5 applications being used Application You can install activate deactivate and delete applications A list of installed applications is shown You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail You can install new applications You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail NOTE To install the applications insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB Port If Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files appears press No To remove the USB memory press Remove Memory and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed message appears Then remove the USB memory Activate Activates the applic
26. memory Administrator tasks Saving ibn you want Send as E mail E poder Documents to USB Memory Connecting Cables Plug the USB memory Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Create a shared folder on the destination computer 6 7 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 6 15 Loading Originals 3 12 wer a u o9 Saving Documents Operation Sending 6 2 to USB Memory Scan to USB 7 5 fthe destination is not stored in the address book you can send by entering the address directly viii To send a FAX only on products with the fax function installed A It faxes As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network o N NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide Administrator tasks Mia you want Send a FAX FAX directly from a computer Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys EIU pean UM iO gt oes eased CEA cases mags yeas MR Loading Paper 3 2 Operation FAX Operation Network FAX Operation For more information refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send the FAX
27. 10 3 Troubleshooting gt Waste Toner Box Replacement Waste Toner Box Replacement When the touch panel displays Check waste toner box replace the waste toner box 1 Remove the old waste toner box Q IMPORTANT Remove the waste toner box as gently as possible so as not to scatter the toner inside Do not let the opening of the waste toner box face downward 2 1 10 4 Troubleshooting gt Waste Toner Box Replacement After replacing the toner containers and the waste toner box clean the internal parts For instructions refer to Cleaning on page 10 7 NOTE Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations 10 5 Troubleshooting gt Replacing the Maintenance Kit MK 370 Replacing the Maintenance Kit MK 370 When the print position shifts out of place or originals are not feeded components must be replaced Contact your Service Representative and purchase the maintenance kit Follow the procedure below to replace the maintenance kit 1 Remove the paper feed roller e LO 7 S KT Z m SEC A PELL o x b Z While pressing down on the hooks x2 shown in the diagram lift up and remove the separation pad 3 Install a new paper feed roller and separation pad Remove the new separation pad and paper feed roller from the maintenanc
28. 200 141 129 115 90 86 78 70 64 50 25 Printing Speed A4 Letter 40 42 sheets min B5 33 sheets min Legal 33 sheets min A5 A6 22 sheets min First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette 7 seconds Warm up Time Power on 22 seconds or less 22 C 71 6 F 60 Sleep 15 seconds or less Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m Multi Purpose Tray 100 sheets 80 g m Letter A4 or less 50 sheets 80 g m more than Letter A4 Output Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets can be set in one sheet increments Image Write System Semiconductor laser 1 beam Main Memory Standard 1024 MB Maximum 2048 MB Interface USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB Host 1 Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T 11 18 Appendix gt Specifications Description Resolution 600 x 600 dpi Operating Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Environment Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 ft maximum Brightness 1 500 lux maximum Dimension W x D x H 11 1 2 x 19 9 16 x 22 5 16 494 x 497 1 x 566 5 mm Weight with toner FS 3540MFP 58 036 Ib 26 38 kg nU FS 3640MFP 58 696 b 26 68 kg Space Required W x D 11 1 2 x 25 7 8 494 x 656 1 mm when using MP tray Power Requirement 120 V Specification Model 120 V 60 Hz more than 9 5 A 230 V Specification M
29. Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 A6 148 x 105 mm Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 B5 257 x 182 mm Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 Folio 210 x 330 mm Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Letter Hagaki 100 x 148mm Legal Oufukuhagaki 148 x 200 mm Statement Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm Executive 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Oficio II 16K 273 x 197 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229mm Size Entry 70 x 148 to 216 x 352 mm Except for the optional paper feeder Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth but it must be uncoated With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 500 sheets of paper cut to the standard size or trade size for a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thic
30. Processing 9 Memory Attention Touch panel Displays buttons Processing Blinks while printing or sending for configuring machine Memory Blinks while the machine is accessing the settings fax memory or USB memory generalpurpose item Attention Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped Numeric keys Clears entered numbers and Returns settings to their Enter numbers and characters default states symbols Specifies registered Cancels or pauses the information such as address printing job in progress numbers and user IDs by number Finalizes numeric key entry Starts copying and and finalizes screen during scanning operations and setting of functions Operates processing for setting linked with the on screen operations OK Preparation before Use gt Part Names Touch Panel Displays the status of the Ready to copy cies 1 7 Displays the time and number of equipment as well as necessary a O08 NENNEN oa copies operation messages Paper FR Zoom Ill Density Selection Ho o o j A 100 N 10 Displays available functions aa OF m es ee E 5 Duplex Combine aec S 1 sided 1 sided Off On e Configures more advanced function Displays Favorites settings 1 a 2 Ili Favorites Displays shortcuts Ready to copy Displays the status of the equipment as well as necessary z Original Size operatio
31. Transparencies must meet the following conditions Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190 C Thickness 0 100 to 0 110 mm Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 To avoid problems use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected 11 14 Appendix gt Paper Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Top sheet Carrier sheet Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used This composition of labels may cause more problems The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet Whe
32. Use the ThinPrint default port 4000 Value Off On Port 1 65535 ThinPrintOverSSL UG 33 Select whether or not to use ThinPrintOverSSL SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 21 Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu NetWare Description NetWare Select the NetWare network connection After that select frame types for NetWare network from Auto Ethernet lIl 802 3 802 2 or SNAP Value Off On Frame Type Auto 802 3 Ether ll 802 2 SNAP A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON AppleTalk Item Description AppleTalk Select the Apple Talk network connection Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON WSD Scan Item Description Select whether or not to use WSD Scan Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON WSD Print Item Description Select whether or not to use WSD Print Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Enhanced WSD Description Enhanced WSD Set whether to use Kyocera s proprietary web services Selecting Off will disable the functionality of WIA and TWAIN drivers If you want to disable KMnet
33. Using Various Functions Background Density Adjust o o Remove dark background from originals such as newspapers E Off Do not use this function Auto Adjusts the density automatically based on the original Manual Manually adjust the density Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Background Density Adj Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies H M Shatpncss q Paper m Zoom il Density Selection N SE Background Density Adj MD 100 Nomao oo a m uud o ee B gt Sq conuinuaus scan Duplex 43 Combine gj Collate 4 l Job Finish Notice 1 sided gt 1 sided Off On c of BE WV i A Favorites Close Add Edi Shortcut Functions GB0001 01 GB0002_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Adjusts the background density Auto 10 10 B L7 NEN e GB0061 00 Manual 10 10 10 10 j a NF d L d Press 1 to 5 Lighter Darker to adjust the background density GB0061 00 GB0062 00 3 49 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Zoom Scan to l USB Reduce or enlarge original to send or store size Reproduces the original size NOTE Adjust the image to match the send or store size Original Size page 3 37 Sending Size page 6 37 Storing Size
34. age 9 23 23 i us Send Box page 9 23 Background Density Copy Auto page 9 23 Adj page 9 23 Send Box Auto page 9 23 Toner Save Level Copy page 9 23 EcoPrint page 9 23 Printer page 9 23 Print Density page 9 23 Auto Color Correction page 9 23 Correcting Black Line page 9 23 Display Brightness page 9 23 Drum Refresh page 9 24 Auto Drum Refresh page 9 24 Service Settings Developer FAX Country Code FAX Call Settings Exchange Selection refer to Fax Operation Guide Europe Only PBX Setting Dial No to PSTN refer to Fax Operation Guide XX 1 Preface This chapter explains the following topics woie q sessetetaes 1 2 Safety Conventions in This Guide slseesssssssssesseeeenee nennen nnne nnne nnus nna nnne sn ssa sana ase ananas anas 1 2 maio aiio ER Eo mmm 1 3 Frocautons TOR USO E 1 3 LOGON ANG ACY ION MMAUOMY C 1 9 Her MIN OVA OGD RN Em E 1 9 Energy Saving COMMON ulisreio M E EE 1 12 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function sseesseesssssssesssseseeee nnne nnne nennen nna rsen se rsen nsa a ns 1 12 AST RECON C ER 1 12 Energy Star ENERGY STARO Program ene rione ttu aee ent
35. ce e l Cancel lt Back ki a o Shortcut System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Shared Shortcut ce Private Shortcut Language English Default Screen Copy Shortcut Shared Shortcut au 1 1 i Cancel GB0749 00 GB0750 00 Displays details for individual shortcuts 9 34 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Editing and Deleting Users User properties can be changed and users can be deleted 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Lacal Authenticatian Simple login settings Local User Authorization GB0435_00 2 Edit or delete a user To edit a user 1 Press for the user whose settings you wish to edit 10 10 Q 18 3 Searches by user name M4 Admin Admin a tj DeviceAdmin 4000 2 User A User A GB0440 01 mer 2 Edit the user For more information about individual settings refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 N User Name System Menu Counter 10 10 2 User Name User A Login User Name Input B Limit 32 ABC v REJ Login Password xokolekokekekelelok Account Name Others Cancel Save GB0441 00 GB0057 54 Login User Name 10 10 Input6 2 Limit64 User Name User af Login User Name User A 1 2 Login Password xokolek
36. gt Functions for Document Box Storing Size Select size of image to be stored Same as Original Size Store an image the same size as the original Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio Il Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 or Youkei 2 Relationship between Original Size Storing Size and Zoom Original Size page 3 37 Storing Size and Zoom page 3 50 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to the same different store as are Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Storing Size Select Same as Original Select the required size Zoom Select 100 or Auto Select Auto NOTE When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can store the image as the actual size No Zoom 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 5 display the screen Ready to store in Box 10 10 Ready to store in Box 10 10 D qii wa NENNEN 75 Original Size H j E arie L Duplex zi Scan LL Format 4 Resolution zz Original Orientation PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi zi Top Edae on Left e X ee 1 3 a XM o DIRNESUIRSEENM ix Stor
37. see page 9 35 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization Off GB0435 00 2 Select On 10 10 Off DENEN 1 1 e GB0908_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Set when Adding a User see page 9 29 or Editing and Deleting Users see page 9 35 Environments in which shortcut can be configured Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Default Screen Set the screen appearing right after the user logs in default screen Shortcut Select either Shared Shortcut or Private Shortcut Language 10 10 10 10 Language English Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut Cancel GB0749 00 GB0744 00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Default Screen 10 10 Language English f Default Screen Copy 1 1 Shortcut Shared Shortcut Document Box Cancel GB0749_00 GB0745_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down When Send or FAX has been selected sets which screen to use as the default screen 10 10 Destination Address Book 3 1 1 Ext Address Book One Touch
38. 00 The document processor is required in order to use 2 sided sheet originals 3 Select the original orientation Ready to send 10 10 10 10 Duplex Ad Top Edge on Top 2 sided Binding Left Right Original Orientation 1 Top Edge on Left 1 Ea Top Edge on Left GB0014 01 p NE t 3 40 GB0011 00 GB0015 00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Continuous Scan ony sona fen USB Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job Originals will be scanned continuously until you press Finish Scan 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Continuous Scan Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies m nnnm ee eee Sharpness Paper L Zoom al Density t 0 N Selecti DEDE election 7 Background Density Adj 2 Mj 10096 Normal 0 Sal gt um EMEN I gt gg Continuous Scan Duplex 3 Combine gj Collate E JOD Finisn INOUCeE UL 4 6 1 sided 1 1 sided Off On GB0001_01 GB0002_01 Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 L7 NN L d GB0043 00 3 Scan the originals Load the original and press the Start key to start scanning Once the original has been scanned load the next original and press the Start key Use the s
39. 00 Register a User Register users to use simple login Up to 20 users can be registered The table below explains the user information to be registered Name Set the user name to display on the Simple Login screen User Select which registered users can use simple login Password Login Set whether to require entry of a login password at login Icon Select the icon to display on the Simple Login screen 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen 9 38 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 2 System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Simple Login Local Authentication On Local User List 1 Simple Login Setup 1 1 1 1 Simple login settings gt GB0710 01 A System Menu Counter ii 3 03 None 04 None Local User Authorization Off GB0435 00 05 None 1 3 Vv Menu EE Select a key with no registered user and press 2 Enter the user information 1 Select the type of user 10 10 Local User Network User gt C Next gt S 2 Select a user Local user System Menu Counter 10 10 g Q Searches by user name amp DeviceAdmin 4000 em User A 1111 ew gt a I b User B 2222 ew gt x t User C 3333 Cancel GB0726 00 Allows you to search for a Displays details for individual users user and sorts re
40. 2 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC sssssssssssssssssssessseeeen nennen nnn nna n nna nnns nn nsn nnns 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Host Name cccccccccseccseeeceeeceecceeeceesaueecaeeseesaueeceeesaeesseessneesseesaaes 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Login User Name ccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeeeeesaeesaeeseeeeaaes 6 6 S ic ulgsr Rep t peor dae M 6 7 aed qeBi ulm ie m 6 10 Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 esses 6 11 SPSCITVING DSSTIMAUOMN 6 15 Choosing from the Address BOOK wii lt acssivsoeccnantacecseesanincece samtdeasisecevewerenaonstensacmelcandesauensmeadeasaencomnonteneden 6 15 Choosing DY ONE TOUCH KEY gecwccacewsssindantcwssunonanssiemedeteruten Secs b ae stones ita n Eea E oec Fes saaa vac tees modb hens 6 17 Entering a New E miall AGGleSS iivaisq uro tepes tnmaneiaads dankwiadb nU autdestadedeenstadaniesasbiamuntadebad iw P PPNU InUaP IER RN CUN CR 6 18 Specifying a New PC Folder ccc ccccccecccececnecceeeeceeecueecanecaueececeucecsuecseeseueesaeesaeesaeessueesaeesseessansseeesagess 6 19 CHECKING and Editing Destinations 5 mentiti e pur Sue etim pa airaa E Sor Comte eaobueacnsmobenedend 6 22 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending seeeesseeeeeeeereeeeeeeen 6 23 Regist
41. 2 Q Address Book ww aaa abc com Ext Address Book 1 bbb abc com 1 1 gt 1 1 Address Entry ccc abc com ddd abc com Cancel GB0583 00 GB0398 01 d Allows you to search for and sort destinations Displays details for individual destinations Enter a new e mail address System Menu Counter 10 10 T T f Input 11 Limit 128 Address Book i Ext Address Book 1 gt 1 1 Address Entry gt e Up to 128 characters can be entered GB0583 00 GB0057 22 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters X 3 Accept the destination System Menu Counter 10 10 abc def com GB0581 01 Menu Cancel t Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Automatic Log History Transmiss ion This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Send Log History Auto Sending Destination Job Log Subject 2 Select the function 10 10 Off On J 1 1 1 L7 NEN d GB0578_00 GB0579 00 System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0580_00 Press On and enter the number of jobs in the log history print You can enter any number between 1 and 16 Manual Log History Transmission You can also send the log history to the
42. 3 41 Conventions in This Guide 1 13 Copying 4 1 Copying Settings Auto 9o Priority 9 13 Auto Paper Selection 9 13 D Date Timer 2 20 9 22 Auto Error Clear 9 22 Auto Panel Reset 9 22 Date Time 9 22 Date Format 9 22 Error Clear Timer 9 22 Panel Reset Timer 9 22 Sleep Timer 9 22 Time Zone 9 22 Default Background Density Adj 9 11 Collate 9 11 Color Selection 9 11 Continuous Scan 9 12 EcoPrint 9 11 E mail Subject Body 9 12 File Format 9 11 File Name Entry 9 12 File Separation 9 11 FTP Encrypted TX 9 12 Image Quality 9 12 JPEG TIFF Print 9 12 Original Image 9 11 Original Orientation 9 11 PDF A Setting 9 12 Scan Resolution 9 11 XPS Fit to Page 9 12 Zoom 9 11 Default Gateway 11 22 Setup 9 17 Default Screen 9 9 Density 3 45 Destination 6 15 Checking and Editing 6 22 Choosing by One Touch Key 6 17 Choosing from the Address Book 6 15 Dest Check before Send 9 14 Entering a New E mail Address 6 18 Entry Check for New Dest 9 14 Multi Sending 6 23 Specifying a New PC Folder 6 19 Developer Unit 2 2 Device Status 8 12 FAX 8 13 Printer 8 13 Removable Memory 8 13 Scanner 8 12 DHCP 11 22 Setup 9 17 DHCP IPv6 11 22 Setup 9 18 Document Processor 2 3 Document Processor Cover 2 4 Index 1 Document Processor Open Close Handle 2 4 dpi 11 23 Duplex 3 39 4 7 Duplex Front Cover 2 2 E EcoPrint 11 23 Copy 4 13 Printer 9 16 E mail Subject Body 6 40 Emulation 11 23 selection 9 16 Encrypted PDF Password 7 11 Energy
43. 4 Youkei 2 or Custom For instructions on how to specify the custom original size refer to Custom Original Size on page 9 9 NOTE Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size originals 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Size Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 NH NENNEN Original Size SS Pa ll densi Ld M E e per E Zoom E Density Selection 4 Original Orientation 2 AA 10096 Normal 0 E Top Edge on Left m i ER Sey pru z Original Image j3 2 Text Phot 5 Duplex Combine gg Collate ete CLC gH ce EcoPrint mes 1 sided Off lon 9 ot fv GB0001 01 GB0002 00 Close Add Edit Shortcul i Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the original size 10 10 Others Cancel Back l G GB0025_00 GB0026_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the original size 3 37 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction To use any of the following functions the document s original orientation must be set e Duplex Combine When placing originals on the platen Top Edge on To
44. 8 Limit 32 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 1 Print Total Off Scan Others Off GB0478 00 GB0057 65 Account ID System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 Account Name Section 01 1 l 0 99999999 Account ID 00000001 00000001 1 2 meae Print Total Off 2 Scan Others Off t GB0476 00 GB0478 00 e Cancel 9 57 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Restriction System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 1 Off Counter Limit Print Total Off Reject Usage Scan Others Off 2 Cancel 7 NE T e System Menu Counter 10 10 Use V or to scroll up and down GB0478_00 e For details refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 59 GB0478_01 3 Register the account System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 100000001 Print Total Off Scan Others Off Cancel GB0478 00 To delete System Menu Counter 2 iQ i iit Sales department 00000001 Menu Select the account name you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon t GB0473 00 9 58 GB0474 00 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of pages a
45. 9 15 Address Book One Touch Address Book page 6 24 One Touch Key page 6 33 Address Book Defaults Sort Print List refer to Fax Operation Guide User Login Job Accounting User Login Settings page 9 25 User Login page 9 27 Local User List page 9 29 Simple login settings page 9 38 Simple Login page 9 38 Simple Login Setup page 9 38 Local User Authorization page 9 33 Group Authorization Set page 9 44 Group Authorization page 9 44 Group List page 9 44 Obtain NW User Property page 9 48 Job Accounting Settings page 9 50 Job Accounting page 9 53 Print Accounting Report page 9 63 Total Job Accounting page 9 61 Printed Pages page 9 61 Scanned Pages page 9 61 FAX TX Pages page 9 61 FAX TX Time page 9 61 Counter Reset page 9 61 Each Job Accounting page 9 61 Accounting List page 9 55 Default Setting page 9 64 Apply Limit page 9 64 Copier Printer Count page 9 64 Default Counter Limit page 9 64 Unknown ID Job page 9 65 XVII Printer page 9 76 Emulation page 9 76 EcoPrint page 9 76 Override A4 Letter page 9 76 Duplex page 9 76 Copies page 9 16 Orientation page 9 16 Wide A4 page 9 16 Form Feed TimeOut page 9 16 LF Action page 9 16 CR Action page 9
46. A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Date Timer Configures settings related to the date and time Description Date Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header Value Year 2000 to 2037 Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western notation Value Month Day Year Day Month Year Year Month Day Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT Choose the nearest listed location from the list Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time automatically reset settings and return to the default setting Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Value Off On NOTE The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the Pane Reset A Timer Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses For details refer to Responding to Error Messages on page 10 13 Value Off On Panel Reset Timer If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds NO
47. Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6 33 Display the screen 1 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen 2 10 10 Dest 0 Check ras Recall EDGE One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book Wu FAX v IN Indi dy Favorites E mail Folder 9 s Functions Select the destination Ready to send 10 10 006 None 1 9 007 None 009 None 010 None 012 No Cancel lt GB0095 00 GB0055 00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered Multiple One Touch Keys can be selected You can specify a one touch key by one touch number by pressing the Quick No Search key Accept the destination Ready to send 10 10 one 003 None 004 None 005 None 006 None 7 1 9 007 None 008 None 009 None 010 None 011 None 012 None Cancel N GB0095 00 Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 sending gt Specifying Destination Entering a New E mail Address Enter the desired e mail address NOTE Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details refer to COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail on page 2 21 1 3 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the
48. Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key 3 Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information 4 Status of job Storing Data T Pausing the job or error Canceling the job L The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals 5 Close Closes the Store Job Status screen NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Scheduled Job screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0014 1233 GB0185 00 Display Key Details Icons that indicate the job type B Sending Job FAX Menu Pressing this key displays Start Now Select the job you wish to send immediately and then press Menu followed by Start Now Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Status of job 5 Sending Waiting Close Closes the Scheduled Job screen NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job History Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs and Storing Jobs The following job histories are available P
49. Copier Printer Count 10 10 10 10 FAX Transmission loff Account Name Section 01 100000001 Print Total Off Scan Others Off Cancel e GB0480 00 GB0480 01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Individual selected for Copier Printer Count System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 ares Scan Others off FAX Transmission Off Account Name Section 01 00000001 Copy Total Off Printer Total Off Cancel ce GB0480 02 GB0480 03 Use VV or A to scroll up and down 2 Select a restriction method 10 10 AE Off Counter Limit Reject Usage L7 NEP If Counter Limit is selected press or numeric keys to select the number of pages and press OK GB0474 00 9 60 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use by Paper Size by Duplex and by Combine to check the number of pages used You can use by Duplex to check the number of pages used in Duplex 1 sided mode Duplex 2 sided mode and
50. Emulation If you use the KPDL Auto emulation mode KPDL and another emulation mode can be automatically switched according to the data alternative emulation Value Line Printer IBM Proprinter DIABLO 630 EPSON LQ 850 PCL6 KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode set whether or not the error report is output Value Off On EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem Value Off On Override A4 Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter which are similar in size as the same size when printing Value Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode Value 1 sided 2 sided Bind LongEdge 2 sided Bind ShortEdge Copies Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Value 1 to 999 copies Orientation Set the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Value Portrait Landscape Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page 78 characters at 10 pitch and Letter size page 80 characters at 10 pitch This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation Value Off On Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer the machin
51. Equipment s Serial Number ssssssssssssssssssssenesen nennen nnne nn nnne nnns earn nn rna sns anna 3 15 CREON INO COUMO e 3 16 LOA LOGOUT eie E E E E E E E EE A E EE E S 3 17 FAO a E E A E EE E 3 19 nice Eit s aio Favorits RR u 3 19 Edi ndg and Deleting Favoritos ssissnsasededpeude exasdDusbed scele dabo a IM utr eE Quad Dx ud en Unda uPbC MeL Pa DUET 3 23 B nelle EET E wee R EE neues sone vernint 3 25 SMOC UNS css rep 3 27 mice itid gie ego LO UCET TRE TT 3 27 Editing and Delstng SNOrCULS csahstainr enie inn e e ea aae AEE ETna ioe ENa Eae e 3 29 Bae EES aro IS E E A AE A E E E EE E 3 30 ae AERA FA e EE E mm 3 31 aE COIN ME A E T EAT E E N ETE E E E E E 3 33 egeo d meae r E E E E E E O 3 34 Usno varous TCA Sree sonarai are eter os GREE E ESE EEE A EEE ENO EAEN EE a EE A N 3 35 DVINA O sne a E E E E E E A RR 3 37 ONNA ONEMAUOIN Tc 3 38 DDIG eana E E EE E EE E E A 3 39 COMINUS SAIN NR em 3 41 FAI O IOCU sinan E A EE E ane E EE E E 3 43 Sur c A 3 44 Brace c 3 45 SCAN RES OUT O NER TT 3 46 Selle 3 47 SADOS S eea E E cim E EEEE secs puEH le
52. Error Messages If the touch panel displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure A Error Message Activation error Checkpoints Corrective Actions Failed to activate the application Contact administrator Reference Page Expansion Authentication is disabled Turn the main power switch off and on If the error exists contact administrator Add the following paper in cassette Does the selected paper size matchs the paper size loaded in the specified paper source Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Is the indicated cassette out of paper Load paper Press Paper Selection to select the other paper source Press Continue to print on the paper in the currently selected paper source Add the following paper in multi purpose tray Error Message Box limit exceeded Does the selected paper size matches the paper size loaded in the specified paper source Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray Checkpoints Load paper Press Paper Selection to select the other paper source Press Continue to print on the paper in the currently selected paper source Corrective Actions Document box is full and no further storage is available Job is canceled Press End Try to perform the job again after p
53. Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported after Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application 11 25 Appendix gt Glossary 11 26 Index A Address Book Adding a Contact 6 24 Adding a Group 6 28 Editing and Deleting 6 31 Adjustment Maintenance Auto Color Correction 9 23 Auto Drum Refresh 9 24 Background Density Adj 9 23 Correcting Black Line 9 23 Density Adjustment 9 23 Display Brightness 9 23 Drum Refresh 9 24 Print Density 9 23 Toner Save Level EcoPrint 9 23 AppleTalk 11 22 Setup 9 20 Application 9 15 Auto Form Feed Timeout 11 22 Auto IP 11 22 Setup 9 17 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function 1 12 Auto Paper Selection 11 22 Auto Sleep 2 19 11 22 B Background Density Adjust 3 49 Bonjour 11 22 Setup 9 17 C Card Authentication Kit 11 4 Cassette Loading Paper 3 3 Paper Size and Media Type 3 31 9 7 9 8 Cassette 1 2 3 Character Entry Method 11 7 Checking the Counter 3 16 Cleaning Document Processor 10 7 Glass Platen 10 7 Machine 10 8 Collate 3 44 Colored Paper 11 16 Color Selection 3 53 Combine 4 10 2in 1 4 10 4in 1 4 10 Border Line 4 10 COMMAND CENTER 2 21 Connecting LAN Cable 2 9 Power Cable 2 10 USB Cable 2 10 Connection Method 2 7 Continuous Scan
54. In the Computer name text box enter the name of the computer that you checked pc001 and then click Search 2 Click pc001 scannerdata that appears in the search results In Windows XP double click the computer pc001 that appears in the search results 2 Check the folder that appears Organize Include in library Share with MA Mou Eoldins my A lir Favorite Name Date modified Type DCN Ji projectA 3 22 2010 10 37 AM File folder Jj Downloads projectB 3 22 2010 10 38 AM File folder E Recent Places Check the address bar The third and following text strings f should be entered for the path In Windows XP double click the scannerdata folder and check the address bar The text string to the right of the third backslash Y should be entered in Path Example scannerdata NOTE You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent In this case share name name of folder in the shared folder should be entered for the Path In the example window above scannerdata projectA is the Path 6 10 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges 1 Check file and printer sharing 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Allow a program throu
55. No b Kj Monitoring BranchCache Hosted Cache Server HTT BranchCache Hosted Cach All No Allow Y river Dy Prone gt 7 BranchCache Peer Discovery WSD In BranchCache Peer Discove All No Allow Connect to a Network Projector TCP In Connect to a Network Proje Private No Allow Y ea J Connect to a Network Projector TCP In Connect to a Network Proje Domain No Allow Y Filter by Group gt connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Private No Allow View gt No No IG Refresh connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Private Allow S i connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Domain No Allow i Export List connect to a Network Projector WSD In Connect to a Network Proje All No Allow Help Ocore Networking Destination Unreacha Core Networking All Yes Allow To NN Rule Type Select the type of firewall rule to create Rule Type What type of rule would you like to create Protocol and Ports i Program Action Profi Rule that cantmle cannections far a nmaram Name BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP Rule that controls connections for a Windows experience Custom Custom rule 6 12 Sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6 r New Inbound Rule Wizard Protocol and Ports Specify the protocols and ports to which this rule applies
56. OE S 2 17 CIN VIII GR sie e L 2 18 FST SAV TURE VCU OM RERO ERE 2 19 Sleep and Auto Sleep ERE RE T deadly iate domdeatenaene ad seo cen aduaeenctedeadans m 2 19 Machine Setup Wizard seienicerirui niniin Ei E RAEE E einen EE EEE EENES 2 20 COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail ccccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeseeeeeseeeseesaeeeeseaseesseeeeeeneeeeraass 2 21 SPRANG ESIGN tcr m J 2 22 2 1 Preparation before Use gt Part Names Part Names Machine EXE 399 4253 ui Yer M AY W W N WN NN W W A NN NN 1 Platen 2 Slit Glass 3 Operation Panel 4 Top Cover 5 Front Cover 6 USB Memory Slot 7 Paper Gauge 8 Toner Container Lock Lever 9 Toner Container 10 Developer Unit 11 Duplex Front Cover 2 2 Preparation before Use gt Part Names AY A IPI 12 Document Processor 13 Inner Tray 14 Paper Length Guide 15 Paper Width Guides 16 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 17 Paper Size Dial 18 Cassette 1 19 Paper Width Guides 20 Multi Purpose Tray MP Tray 21 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 22 Handholds 23 Rear Unit 24 Fuser Cover 25 Envelope Switch 2 3 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 26 Document Processor Cover 27 Original
57. Port Number Use the FTP default port 21 Value Off On Port 1 65535 FTP Server Reception Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP Value Off On SMB Client Select whether or not to send documents using SMB When selecting On set the SMB default Transmission Port Number Use the SMB default port 139 For Windows Vista use 445 Value Off On Port 1 65535 LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP Value Off On SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP Value Off On SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3 Value Off On HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP Value Off On HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 21 Value Off On IPP Select whether or not to communicate using IPP When selecting On set the IPP default Port Number Use the IPP default port 631 Value Off On Port 1 65535 IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL When selecting On set the IPP over SSL default Port Number Use the IPP over SSL default port 443 SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 21 Value Off On Port 1 65535 Raw Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port Value Off On ThinPrint UG 33 Select whether or not to use ThinPrint When selecting On set the default ThinPrint Port Number
58. Printer Priority in Optional Memory Removable memory error Is writing to a removable An error occurred in the removable 2 memory prohibited memory The job stopped Press End Possible error codes are as follows 01 Connect a removable memory that can be written to An error occurred in the removable 2 memory The job stopped Press End Possible error codes are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Restart the system or turn the power OFF ON If the error still occurs the removable memory is not compatible with the machine Use the removable memory formatted by this machine If the removable memory cannot be formatted it is damaged Connect a compatible removable memory Removable Memory is full Job is canceled Press End Insufficient free space in the removable memory Delete unneeded files Remove originals in the Are there any originals left in the Remove originals from the document document processor document processor processor Replace all originals and press Remove originals from the document Continue processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press Continue to resume printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Replace MK Replacement of the parts in the maintenance kit is necessary at every 300 000 pages of printing and requires professional servicing Contact
59. Register the destination 10 10 Name Sales department 1 Address Number Auto E mail Address GB0078 02 Cancel 6 27 2 Connection Test 10 10 GB0696 00 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Adding a Group Compile two or more contacts into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book Before adding a group in the Address Book the contacts to be included in the group must be added first NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Designations in the group can also be registered in the system menu 1 Display the screen 10 10 J Dest 0 Check Send Heare Ext Address Book GB0055_00 i One Touch Key IF 1 2 w E mail i Ready to send 10 10 B QUSI 123456 123456 e J001 123456 123 456789 co G 1 1 001 p 123456 12345 com a 001 123456 11111 com GB0426 01 d GF a 2 Adds a new destination 10 10 Use v or AN to scroll up and down GB0396 01 3 Select the registration method 10 10 1 1 el GB0419 01 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Enter the group name Support department Input 18 1 Limit 32 GB0057 16 Up to 32 characters can be ente
60. Select the print system to be installed Installer Installer Discover Printing System 2 Choose the printing system you would like to install Install the recommended printing software The printing system must be connected Custom Mode Create a custom installation Utilities Install printing system utilities only Installer Printer Settings Type a name for your printer Some programs do not support printer and server name combinations longer than 31 characters Printing system name Share your printer with other users To share this printer type a share name __ O o v Set as default printer ORKYOCERA 3 Start installing Installer Confirm Settings Confirm your installation settings Click Back to make changes El To start the installation click Install KYOCERA NOTE The machine cannot be detected unless it is on If the computer fails to detect the machine verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on and click Reload If the Windows security window appears click Install this driver software anyway 4 Finish the installation Installer Installation Completed Installation details Ew Iv Print a test page v Enable Status Monitor E I Show Quick Print tab Set Quick Print tab as default xi KYOCERA This completes the printer driver installation pr
61. The Folder SMB Address 1 Enter Host Name Path Port Login User Name and Login Password Ready to send 10 10 Input 3 pr i 2 Limit 64 Host Name Login User Name Cancel GB0705 02 GB0057 15 Use V or AN to scroll up and down For more information refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6 19 2 Confirm the connection status Ready to send 10 10 ae 10 10 Host Name 2 Connection Test Path Port Login User Name 1 GB0705_03 GB0696 00 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry Ready to send 10 10 Host Name Path Port Login User Name Cancel GB0705 03 The Folder FTP Address 1 Enter Host Name Path Port Login User Name and Login Password 10 10 Input 3 Limit 64 Host Name Login User Name Cancel 1O FS N i e eo a o GB0709 02 Use V or AN to scroll up and down For more information refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6 19 N 6 26 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 2 Confirm the connection status 10 10 1 2 Port 21 Login User Name 1 abc GB0709 03 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry Ready to send 10 10 Host Name abc Login User Name abc GB0709 03
62. Touch Key Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down System Menu Counter T E Internet 2 AN L Address Book One Touch 4 5 C User Login Job Accounting E Printer VY System Menu Counter Address Book gt One Touch Key Address Book Defaults gt Print List gt lt gt System Menu Counter 9 gt 1 GB0054 03 10 10 GB0411 00 2 Edit or delete the destination To edit the destination 10 10 Tnt 3 003 None 001 Sales 002 None ii department 1 1 004 None 005 None 006 None 1 9 Delete 008 None 009 None 007 None 012 None 011 None 010 None lul Select the One Touch Key you wish to edit and press Menu followed by Edit IC GB0430 00 m 2 et GB0422 01 To delete System Menu Counter 5 00 ales uuz None uus None b Ji E department 1 department 1 1 004 None 005 None 006 None 1 9 007 None 008 None 009 None 011 None 012 None 010 None C GB0422 01 Select the One Touch Key you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon 6 35 sending gt Sending Functions Sending Functions Send screen shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use V or A to select the function What do you want to
63. Users 2tessazveci aerae Reo pes zn ke buda x pase sad uci emua sue temi zu etdmuc ie sadun ua D dul uU e Pup ama ui 9 35 ROUTAN OA pe E attractor 9 38 Group Authori atiorn acest TERR mw 9 44 Obtain Network User Property ccccccssscccseseecceuceeseuceeceeeeeceeeecsuueeeceeecseaseessueeessueeeesaueeesesesessegsessaas 9 48 JOD AC OUND seei CP E 9 50 FICS GOD SCOURS seisan E A EE errs aa aaa P 9 50 POM INGE OCMC UES ITE ii E DOO EUER 9 52 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting sseesssssssssseseeeeeennenn menn nnne nnns nnn nan nns 9 53 Weile M 9 54 PACING ANAC OOUE MTM 9 55 Editing and Deleting Accounts DANN T T LC 9 57 Restricting the Use of the Machine cccccescccesccceececeececeeseceueeceuseseesensueeeeeseseusenseseteueenseseneseeseneess 9 59 Counting the Number of Pages Printed ccccecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeseeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeaeeeseeesaneeeeses 9 61 Prnt ng anecounting REDON sisses ennaa ada ad taion A rbi tator dug der rada aa di ue d d dni 9 63 Job ACCOUNTING Default Setting zio sto tuner ipaa eddie mio ac ed igu o dein da uud Cis Ioa mosse uS SD s Ud utc ud tm pk esae 9 64 Unknown Login User Name Job sseesssssssssssesesee eene nn nnn n nennen n nnn nnn ener n
64. Viewer functionality Enhanced WSD Enhanced WSD SSL SNMP and SNMPv3 refer to Protocol Detail on page 9 19 must be set to Off Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Enhanced WSD SSL Item Description Enhanced WSD SSL Set whether to use Kyocera s proprietary web services over SSL Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON 9 20 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu IPSec Item Description Make this setting when you use IPSec Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Secure Protocol Description SSL Select whether or not to use SSL Value Off On IPP Security Select the IPP security level This setup is available when SSL is On Value IPP IPP over SSL IPPoverSSL only HTTP Security Select the HTTP security level This setup is available when SSL is On Value HTTP HTTPS HTTPS Only LDAP Security Ext Address Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server Book This setup is available when SSL is On Value Off LDAPv3 TLS LDAP over SSL LDAP Security User Property A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON LDAP must be set to On in Protocol Detail o
65. Zurich Phone 41 1 908 49 49 Fax 41 1 908 49 50 www kyoceramita ch KYOCERA MITA SALES COMPANIES IN EMEA KYOCERA MITA INTERNATIONAL SALES Europe Middle East amp North Africa Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 www kyoceramita europe com AUSTRIA KYOCERA MITA AUSTRIA GmbH Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 A 1230 Wien Phone 43 1 86 338 0 Fax 43 1 86 338 400 www kyoceramita at BELGIUM S A KYOCERA MITA Belgium N V Sint Martinusweg 199 201 BE 1930 Zaventem Phone 32 2 720 9270 Fax 32 2 720 8748 www kyoceramita be DENMARK KYOCERA MITA Denmark A S Ejby Industrivej 60 DK 2600 Glostrup Phone 45 70 22 3880 Fax 45 45 76 3850 www kyoceramita dk FINLAND KYOCERA MITA Finland OY Kirvesmiehenkatu 4 FI 00880 Helsinki Phone 358 9 4780 5200 Fax 358 9 4780 5390 www kyoceramita fi FRANCE KYOCERA MITA France S A Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme FR 91195 Gif sur Yvette CEDEX Phone 33 1 6985 2600 Fax 33 1 6985 3409 www kyoceramita fr GERMANY KYOCERA MITA Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Str 12 D 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 918 0 Fax 49 2159 918 100 www kyoceramita de ITALY KYOCERA MITA Italia S P A Via Verdi 89 91 I 20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio MI Phone 39 02 921 791 Fax 39 02 921 796 00 www kyoceramita it THE NETHERLANDS KYOCERA MITA Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA
66. and select Properties The System Properties dialog box appears Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears 2 Check the computer name Check the computer name in the window that appears If there is a workgroup Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name Change settings Full computer name Computer description Workgroup abcdnet All characters appearing in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example PC001 If there is a domain Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name Change settings Full computer name 2 Computer description Domain abcdnet The characters to the left of the first dot in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example pc001 After checking the computer name click the ess Close button to close the System Properties screen In Windows XP after checking the computer name click the Cancel button to close the System Properties screen 6 5 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Checking What to Enter for Login User Name Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows 1 Display the window From the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt The Command Prompt window appears Check the domain name and user name At the Command Prompt enter net config workstation and then press E
67. at least 48 hours e Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or corners are crushed In order to prevent these problems be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test Glossy paper e Watermarked paper e Paper with an
68. automatically based on the original Sending gt Scanning using TWAIN Detail Configuration This is used to check current settings and store frequently used settings When the Configuration button is clicked a setting screen opens with buttons for Details Add current configuration and Delete selected configuration Details Current settings can be checked Add current Save current settings with a name and comment configuration Delete selected Delete saved settings configuration a a 3 Place the originals WA x p AN de Ew WA i amp For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 12 N 4 Scan the originals Click the Scan button The document data is scanned 6 46 7 Document Box This chapter explains the following topics Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory sss nennen nennen nnns 7 2 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB sssssssssssssssssseee nee nnne nnne nnne 7 5 Removing USB MaMy T T 7 8 F uncuons TOF Document BOX NN TEE 7 9 Bol seas 7 10 Encrypted PDF PassWord c 7 11 duc addi E eeeee 7 12 DO IC OP AOC ses 7 13 SONG AE c
69. click Cancel During the installation double click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the screen the installation is completed Using WSD 4 Press the Send key Send 2 Place the originals For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 12 6 42 Sending gt WSD Scan 3 Display the screen Ready to send 10 10 IRadytosend to send 10 10 l pesta 0 Dest 0 Recall La ESE al Sar Check b er r WD WSD Scan 2 One Touch One Touch Key j Address Book Ext Address Book E mail GB0055 00 4 Scan the originals Procedure using this machine Ready to send 10 10 From Computer From From operaton pene 000000 Panel L7 NEP l 4 GB0648 00 2 Select the destination computer 10 10 Reload Cancel GB0649 00 Updates the list Displays information for individual destination computers 3 Press the Start key Start Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated 6 43 GB0055 01 Sending gt WSD Scan Procedure from Your Computer Ready to send 10 10 From Computer From Operation Panel gt 1 1 GB0648 00 mmer d 2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images 6 44 sending gt Scanning using TWAIN Scanning using TWAIN This section explai
70. copy 10 10 Copes rE H 1 Paper L Zoom Density bre Selection A TEE A40 100 Normal 0 a um uEEEEEEN Duplex Combine gg Collate 1 sided Off On Select the function Ready to copy 10 10 a a 3 57 GB0069 00 Ready to copy 10 10 aj File Name Entry d Priority Override Add Edi i Shortcut GB0001_01 GB0002_02 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Print from USB Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 3 58 4 Copying This chapter explains the following topics BASIC OPTAN METEO 4 2 amp eoelzonejeA 4 4 co 4 5 BW U 4 7 Sonic 4 10 zen d L Unm 4 13 4 1 Copying gt Basic Operation Basic Operation 1 Press the Copy key Copy NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up O For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 12 N 3 Selecting the functions ER s ty Select the copier s functions to use H M Paper Da Zoom HB Density Press Functions to display other functions election LS MES uU IIIJ 002 Normal 0 Refer
71. etie bae acti au deemesast dieu Ra eeu eia 1 12 ADOUL WG ecce net M c 1 13 Conventions in This Guide ssesssesssesseesseeeeeee nennen nnne nnn nnn nnne nsu ranis esa rasis asas rasa sanas ann ss 1 13 nginals and Paper SBS acra ena ae Tem 1 15 1 1 Preface gt Notice Notice Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient A attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from A insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol N General warning N Warning of high temperature The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes informatio
72. from date of installation whichever first occurs In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period Kyocera s only obligation and the Customer s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser referred to as the Customer of a new Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada based upon the country of purchase In order to obtain performance of this warranty the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area or check Kyocera s website at www kyoceramita com us This warranty does not cover MFP s or accessories which a have become damaged due to operator negligence misuse accidents improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress b have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies c have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer or d have had the serial number modified altered or removed This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits which consist of the developing unit the drum unit the transfer roller the
73. image quality Copy Send Scan to USB Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 ABC ABCE A Text Photo Photo Text Photo Photo oman Printer Output GB0037 01 GB0037 02 3 47 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Sharpness USB Adjust the sharpness of the image When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patterns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Blur Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Sharpness 10 10 10 10 Copies 1 ee m Paper S Zoom E Density t 0 N N Selection Ag Background Density Adj A40 100 Normal 0 Off ae ee 2 3 m um m r um jig Continuous Scan Duplex Combine gg Collate or p 4 Job Finish Notice 1 sided gt 1 sided off On Off GB0001 01 GB0002 01 Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Adjust the sharpness Ready to copy 10 10 GB0060 00 E e Press 3 to 3 Blur Sharpen to adjust the sharpness 3 48 Common Operations gt
74. images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 49 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 41 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 54 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry page 3 56 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority Priority Override gt page 3 57 Copying gt Copying Functions Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image Auto A4 141 l J Tel amp lt A6 70 HE lt Adjusts the image to match the paper size Standard Zoom Adjusts the image to match present sizes Zoom Level Original Copy Zoom Level Original Copy Inch Models 400 Max Metric Models 400 Max 200 200 129 STMT gt gt Letter 141 A5 gt gt A4 100 100 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt STMT 50 25 Min Standard Zoom Other Zoom Level Original Copy Inch Models 141 A5 gt gt A4 115 B5 gt gt A4 90 Folio gt gt 86 A4 gt gt B5 70 A4 gt gt A5 Zoom Entry lt N Specify the image size in 1 increment between 25 400 of the original Display the screen Metric Models 90 Folio gt gt A4 70 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Zoom Level Original Copy 129 STMT gt gt L
75. in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image equipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large amount of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer WIA Windows
76. is referred to as Sleep o If print data is received during Sleep the touch panel lights up and printing starts If you are using the products equipped with the fax function received data is printed out while the operation panel remains unlit To resume press the Power key The machine will be ready to use within 15 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time The default preset time is 1 minute For more information about configuring settings refer to Sleep Timer on page 9 22 N 2 19 Preparation before Use gt Machine Setup Wizard Machine Setup Wizard The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed System Menu Counter 10 10 Welcome This wizard will help you set up your machine To continue press Next gt el Following the instructions on the screen to configure the following settings GB0889_00 Date Time settings Time Zone Summer Time Date Time Network settings Obtain IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway O For details about settings refer to the help information displayed on the touch panel To make N changes after this initial configuration refer to Date Timer on page 9 22 and Sy
77. iu 2 paum e Ej Original Image E a e Text Photo Duplex Combine g Collate 4 c P EcoPrint 1 sidedf gt 1 sided Off On Add Edit L Shortcut GB0001 01 GB0002 00 Press Functions on the Copy Send or Document Box screen and then Add Edit Shortcut 2 Select Add 10 10 Add GB0790 00 3 Select the key 10 10 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 Cancel Next gt GB0791 00 Select the key to which you wish to register the shortcut NOTE If you select a shortcut number already registered the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one 3 21 Common Operations gt Shortcuts 4 Select the function 10 10 Paper Selection gJ c x GB0792_00 Cancel Back Next gt i Select the function screen to display with the shortcut T 5 Enter the shortcut name Input 10 1 Limit24 GB0057 04 Up to 24 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters X G Register the shortcut Ready to copy 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 GB0793_00 e Confirm the settings and press Save 3 28 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Editing and Deleting Shortcuts Change shortcut number name or delete shortcut 1 Display the screen 10 10 10 10 n Copies
78. main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source Attention Le d branchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l appareil hors tension Les interrupteurs sur l appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement ils ne mettent pas l appareil hors tension WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help e he us
79. mw A Press the two envelope switches green to change the paper feed mode to envelope mode A CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer is hot Do not touch it with your hands as it may result in burn injury 3 Close the rear cover NOTE When printing on plain paper press the two envelope switches green again to change the paper feed mode to plain paper mode 3 10 Common Operations gt Loading Paper When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Close the flap Return postcard Cardstock Portrait form Landscape form Oufuku Hagaki Hagaki envelopes envelopes Load envelope with the print side facing up 3 11 Common Operations gt Loading Originals Loading Originals Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals NOTE Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals Align it flush against the Original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point Put the scanning side facedown Open the original cover or document processor and place the original A CAUTION Do not
80. pages Press Cancel to cancel printing sending or storing Memory is full Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up Press Continue to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press Cancel to cancel the job When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses P Error Message Paper jam Checkpoints Corrective Actions If a paper jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Reference Page Print overrun 10 16 Warning Low printer memory The job was paused Re starting the job Press Continue Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages R Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page RAM disk error An error has occurred on the RAM disk 9 22 Job is canceled Press End The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Restart the system or turn the power OFF ON If the error still occurs divide the file into smaller files 04 Insufficient space on the RAM disk Increase the RAM disk size by changing RAM Disk Setting in the system menu NOTE The range of RAM disk size can be increased by selecting
81. reject usage of send functions other than faxing FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored Each user s properties are Machine Administrator User Name DeviceAdmin Login User Name 4000 Login Password 4000 Access Level Machine Administrator Administrator User Name Admin Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Access Level Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user name and login password regularly for your security 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen 9 29 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Lacal Authenticatian Local User List Simple login settings Local User Authorization GB0435_00 Enter the user information User Name Input Limit 32 GB0057 51 Input Limit64 GB0057 53 Access Level 10 10 Administrator e LL 1 1 GB0445 00 A Select the user access privilege Check the settings setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administrat
82. screen may appear NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory GB0089 00 2 Select and open the folder in which the file you wish to print is stored The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder To return to a higher level folder press Back 3 Select the file 10 10 5 _ B 11 3 3aPG MW 7 9 2 PG GB0089 02 Select the file to be printed and press Print 4 Enter the quantity Copies 1 A EP Paper gg Collate 13 Duplex V Selection LL P 1 Jr 4 AFD On 1 sided gt iss A U O n C lt F X N O m GB0097 00 Functions Cancel NOTE Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity 1 3 GB0089 03 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 5 Select the functions 10 10 int Copics 1 Copies 1 Collate 4 Duplex 1 sided GB0097_00 Cancel Select the function to use for Document Box Press Functions to display other functions For details refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7 9 6 Start printing Start Press the Start key to start printing Remove the USB memory For details refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7 8 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This f
83. than 16 characters Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be displayed Description File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent Value PDF TIFF JPEG XPS Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults Value Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left Collate Set the defaults for Collate Value Off On File Separation Select the default file separation setting Value Off Each Page Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution Value 600 x 600dpi 400 x 400dpi Ultra Fine 300 x 300dpi 200 x 400dpi Super Fine 200 x 200dpi Fine 200 x 100dpi Normal Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents Value Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale Black amp White Original Image Set the default original document type Value Text Photo Photo Text Graphic Map Text for OCR Printer Output Background Density Adj Select the default value for background density adjustment Value Off Auto Manual Darker 5 EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default Value Off On Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the originals set Value 100 Auto Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Continuous Scan Description Set the continuous scan defaults Value Off On File Name Entry Set an
84. the Appropriate Paper cccccccceeccceeccceeeceseceeseeeeeeeseeessaeeeseesseeseas Kors ie t2 M ad o rc MERERI 11 14 SPACCATO E 11 18 PNG TV SY ENERO u EEEE E 11 18 gini acceoaes 11 20 CA MP E E E E T se eteeseeeees 11 20 DOCUMENT ProCESSOr 11 21 Environmental Specifications cccccccccceccseccce cece eeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeseeeseeesnees 11 21 IOS SAN Me T 11 22 ise T E A Index 1 Vi Qu ick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine To make copies P Itcopies Simply press the Start key to make copies You can also fine tune the copy settings by changing the 7 paper size adjusting the density etc To print It prints You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory Iu Eau Printing P rint over What you want Copying with TIE Print via a the USB to do specific settings Removable USB network connection Memory Install the printer driver on your computer 2 73 Loading Paper 3 2 Loading Originals 3 12 Printing Documents Operation Copying 4 2 Stored in Printing from Applications 5 2 Removable USB Memory 7 2 Vil To send documents m It sends You can send scanned images via a network Or you can also store scanned images in USB
85. the TWAIN Driver 1 Display the screen 1 Select Start button of the Windows display All Programs Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver Setting 2 Click Add amp Kyocera TWAIN Driver na lt Scanner List Toe ee Sat da Add About Help 2 Configure TWAIN Driver Kyocera TWAIN Driver ea x Name 1 Enter the machine name Model Select this machine from the list Scanner Address 1521684821 3 Enter the machine s IP address or host name When using SSL select the checkbox beside SSL User Authentication Setting When user login administration is enabled select E eren the checkbox beside Authentication and enter ee Login User Name up to 64 characters and administrator Password up to 64 characters Password i 2 When job accounting is enabled select the ss 2 b checkbox beside Account ID and enter the 4 account ID as many as eight digits Help EXE anne NOTE When the machine s IP address is unknown contact Administrator 3 Finish registering amp Kyocera TWAIN Driver S Scanner List About Help NOTE Click Delete to delete the added machine Click Edit to change names Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Setting WIA Driver Register this machine to the WIA Driver Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 NOTE The following is not necessary to r
86. the account ID as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 59 NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 52 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter Iz Q 2 Accounting List AN DeTauIT 5etung 1 1 o ceo N e a o GB0461 01 d Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Enter the account information Account Name Input 8 1 Limit 32 N e N LO e eo a o Account ID 0 99999999 00000001 GB0479 00 e 9 55 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Account Name Account Name Section 01 oo000dffr Print Total Off Scan Others Off Account ID N e Account ID System Menu Counter Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 1 2 Print Total Scan Others Off Off a Restrictions System Menu Counter Account Name Account ID 10 10 Section 01 00000001 1 Print Total ff Scan Others Off System Menu Counter FAX Transmission loff n 4 Register the accoun
87. the envelope switch setting Match the paper type and the envelope match the paper type switch position Check waste toner box Is the waste toner box full Replace the waste toner box The waste toner box is not installed correctly Set it correctly When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses E Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Error occurred at cassette Remove the indicated cassette Press Next gt to follow the instructions Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Failed to specify Job Failed to specify Job Accounting when Accounting processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Failed to store job retention data The job is canceled Press End When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses 10 14 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Incorrect account ID The account ID was incorrect when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Incorrect Login User Name or The login user name or password was Password incorrect when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Inner tray is full of paper Remove paper from the i
88. the function and make changes as necessary Function Type Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Destination Address Book 2 2 Functions 2 Function Type Wizard Cancel lt Back Save GB0766_02 6 Register the favorite Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number Auto GB0766_00 Cancel 3 22 LEE AY a 10 10 lt GB0775 00 Common Operations gt Favorites Editing and Deleting Favorites This section describes how to edit name and permission of the registered favorites and how to delete favorites 4 Display the screen Favorites Select the function 10 10 ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre Application eo im ES jm VS ss Book 2 Edit or delete a favorite To edit a favorite 1 Select the favorite you wish to edit _ Se 10 10 2 Edit the favorite Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number 01 Owner Admin IE Name 10 10 1 2 Number pn DI 10 10 Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending e 3 23 GB0781 00 GB0781 00 GB0779 00 Scan to E mail A ss Entry a S a S a S Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A ddress Book GB0056 00 10 10 01 Mif Sending Job E mail 15 ID Card Copy Sending Job E mail 1 2 16 G Paper Saving Copy 17 im Sc
89. the machine to warm up O For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 12 N 3 Specifying destination Ready to send arn Select the destination to which to send an image Qu Gees For details refer to Specifying Destination on page 6 15 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book d N E mail Folder i s Functions vy Favorites GB0055 00 4 Selecting the functions Ready to send mem 0 Press Functions to display the sending functions to use Recall ERN For details refer to Sending Functions on page 6 36 N One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book M E mail EN Folder FAX L Ema O o eem GB0055_00 6 3 Sending gt Basic Operation 5 Start sending Sta rt Press the Start key to start sending 6 4 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges Checking What to Enter for Host Name Check the name of the destination computer 1 Display the window From the Start menu select Computer and then System Properties In Windows XP right click My Computer
90. the touch panel Originals Horizontal direction Vertical direction Preface gt About this Operation Guide 1 16 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the following topics BML PA VS Se cht ct at cee 2 2 DNV NNN sect cease eect bate E MA 2 2 SAO PAIS BNNINEENTRN T EE 2 5 TOUS WS deca tccge 2 6 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables ccccccccssececeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeseneeeeeeeseeeeseeesseeessnees 2 7 Connection Example M P 2 7 Preparing Necessary Cables c ccccccscccesccceececesecceueeccsececseeeceusesseeeseusessueessueesegeessseeesaeeecseessnseesseeeens 2 8 GME CUI CADIS S eer E E E E E A N 2 9 COMIMECTING EAN CADIS irent eaae aee E EE E tss niu e Gr nam dii 2 9 depa einedscsib o C ee 2 10 Connecting the Power Cable ccccccccccssceceseeccsscceeecceuececsecessececeuseseucessusessueessueeseueeesseseneseetansenaeens 2 10 POWT I O m 2 11 POWO T ee E E 2 11 morae ereen E E E E eee ee 2 11 S M yO AG se escent R E E E E 2 13 IOVS PUVA Paner DVS seses E E E A a a a 2 13 Seino TWAIN TOT IV
91. uneven surface e Perforated paper 11 13 Appendix gt Paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used Transparencies Preprinted paper e Bond paper Recycled paper Thin paper from 60 g m to 64 g m or less e Letterhead Colored paper e Prepunched paper Envelopes e Cardstocks Hagaki e Thick paper from 106 g m to 220 g m or less Labels e High quality paper When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper envelopes cardstocks and labels Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems Before purchasing special paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper oelect a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Transparencies Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing
92. 1 Los Size XS A4 Au ud ag Original Orientation Top Edge on Left Paper R Zoom il Density rr a7 Original Image Selection A40 100 Normal 0 Combine amm Collate 1 sided 1 sided Off On s Functions Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 pid Favorites cm R A 13 Duplex Press Functions on the Copy Send or Document Box screen and then Add Edit Shortcut Tih Text Photo 6 EcoPrint GB0001 04 GB0002 00 Add Edit Shortcut J Edit or delete a shortcut To edit a shortcut 1 Select the shortcut type and number you wish to edit 10 10 10 10 2 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 F 1 1 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 Cancel Next gt d GB0790 01 GB0796 00 2 Editthe shortcut No 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 1 Functions Zoom m GB0794 00 E GB0797_00 t Name Ready to copy 10 10 Input 10 3z Limit 24 _ Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 1 1 e eo e r LO Q O a o GB0797 00 3 29 Common Operations gt Shortcuts 3 Register the shortcut 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 Functions Zoom Cancel GB0797_00 Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Private Shortcut 1 Edit Private Shortcut 2 1 1 J 1 1 Shared Shortcut 2 5 z M S S Cancel OK a e E 5 S 3 L ED Select the s
93. 16 Paper Feed Mode page 9 16 Resolution page 9 17 KIR page 9 17 XVIII System page 9 77 Network page 9 17 Host Name page 9 17 TCP IP Settings page TCP IP page 9 17 9 17 IPv4 Settings page 9 77 IPv6 Settings page 9 78 Protocol Detail page 9 79 Netware page 9 20 AppleTalk page 9 20 WSD Scan page 9 20 WSD Print page 9 20 Enhanced WSD page 9 20 Enhanced WSD SSL page 9 20 IPSec page 9 27 Secure Protocol page SSL page 9 27 9 21 IPP Security page 9 27 HTTP Security page 9 27 LDAP Security Ext Address Book page 9 27 LDAP Security User Property page 9 27 LAN Interface page 9 27 Interface Block Setting page 9 27 USB Host page 9 27 USB Device page 9 27 Optional Interface page 9 27 Security Level page 9 4 Restart page 9 4 RAM Disk Setting page 9 22 Optional Memory page 9 22 Optional Function page 11 5 Date Timer page 9 22 Date Time page 9 22 Date Format page 9 22 Time Zone page 9 22 Auto Panel Reset page 9 22 Auto Error Clear page 9 22 Panel Reset Timer page 9 22 Sleep Timer page 9 22 Error Clear Timer page 9 22 Unusable Time refer to Fax Operation Guide XIX Adjustment Density Adjustment Copy page 9 23 Maintenance page 9
94. 7 Login Password page 9 7 Access Level page 9 7 Account Name page 9 7 E mail Address page 9 7 Simple Login page 9 7 My Panel page 9 7 Group Name page 9 7 Group ID page 9 7 XIV Cassette MP Tray Settings page 9 7 Cassette 1 to 4 page Paper Size page 9 7 9 7 Media Type page 9 7 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size page 9 8 page 9 8 Media Type page 9 8 Common Settings page 9 9 Default Screen page 9 9 Sound page 9 9 Buzzer page 9 9 Volume page 9 9 Key Confirmation page 9 9 Job Finish page 9 9 Ready page 9 9 Warning page 9 9 Key Confirmation USB Keyboard page 9 9 FAX Speaker Volume refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Monitor Volume refer to Fax Operation Guide Original Settings page 9 9 Custom Original Size page 9 9 Default Original Size page 9 9 Paper Settings page 9 Custom Paper Size page 9 70 10 Media Type Settings page 9 70 Default Paper Source page 9 10 Paper Selection page 9 10 Media for Auto B amp W page 9 10 Special Paper Action page 9 10 XV Function Defaults page 9 11 File Format page 9 11 Original Orientation page 9 11 Collate page 9 11 File Separation page 9 11 Scan Resolution page 9 11 Color Selection page 9 11 Ori
95. 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 100 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Name Enter the login user name to login up to 64 characters The same login user name cannot be registered Login Password Enter the password to login up to 16 characters Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can login without entering the account ID Refer to Job Accounting on page 9 50 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address up to 128 characters The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Local Authorization Restricts the use of the machine by user Local user authorization must be enabled to use this function see page 9 33 The following restriction items are available Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Send Select whether or not to
96. 9 Cancel OK Es e E o Input System Menu Counter 10 10 Limit 1 28 Group ID 1234567890 1 Group Name Group 01 1 3 gt Access Level Administrator Printer Off GB0460 00 GB0057 63 d Access Level System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 Administrator User Group Name Group 01 1 Access Level Administrator Printer Off o o Q 10 E o a o NE el GB0460 00 9 46 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Printer Copy Send FAX Transmission Storing in Box Storing in Memory System Menu Counter 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Group 01 Access Level Administrator Printer Off Cancel System Menu Counter 10 10 FAX Transmission Storing in Box System Menu Counter Storing in Memory Off e Change the restrictions as needed 4 Register the group 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Group 01 Access Level Administrator System Menu Counter 10 10 Reject Usage GB0456 00 a a GB0460_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0460_01 GB0460_02 GB0460_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Obtain Network User Property oet the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server NOTE To obtain the network user p
97. 9999999 for security Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies e Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup For details about the configuration method refer to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 52 4 Enable job accounting 10 10 On 1A GB0462 00 a NEN k d 2 Add an account System Menu Counter Q Gi Sales department 00000001 e 10 10 1 1 d e e 2 End t e a 9 3 Log out Logout 9 50 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 4 Other users login for operations Enter the account ID 10 10 Enter the account ID Check Login Counter GB0725 00 t 9 51 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Settings 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down ido Int t lt gt System Menu Counter idi E Address Book One Touch 2 rr User Login Job Accounting 1 E Printer i System Menu Counter User Login Settings Job Accounting Settings gt Unknown ID Job 10 10 GB0054 03 Reject GB0434 00 NOTE You can only cha
98. AX Operation Guide Describes fax functionality Card Authentication Kit B Operation Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card Guide KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Describes how to access the machine from a computer via a Web browser to check and Operation Guide change settings Printer Driver Operation Guide Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality Network FAX Driver Operation Guide Describes how to install and use the network fax driver in order to use network fax functionality KM NET for Direct Printing Operation Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe Guide Acrobat or Reader KMnet Viewer User Guide Describes how to monitor the network printing system with KMnet Viewer PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Describes the native printer language PRESCRIBE commands Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of emulation Reference Contents 1 BE SS aaa cn eee attic ri sae invari uus pet rm weiss gen ea UNES PUN MUN UMEN NNMNUMEERIDINRESEUE 1 1 juo A o0 1 2 Safety Conventions in This Guide cccccccseeceececseeceeeceaeeceeesaeeeeaeeseeeseesaeeeseeesagees 1 2 aide BRE cif MR RR 1 3 mise ip 2N089 1 3 Legal Restrictio
99. Cancel GB0017 00 GB0018 00 Use VV or to scroll up and down Copying gt Copying Functions 3 Sets the boundary line type 10 10 Original Orientation Top Edge on Left 4 Select the original orientation 10 10 D Wa d 4 12 GB0017_01 GB0017_01 i 2 Ready to copy 1 Solid Line j Dotted Line 5 Positioning Mark Ad Top Edge on Top Ea Top Edge on Left NEP l e GB0019 00 lt 1O o o a o Copying gt Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion when high quality print gr Display the screen is not required 1 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 Copies r Hl pa E Paper A Zoom Density 7 Selection i ap LLL i ULL one um a fr Duplex Combine gp Collate L Off On 1 sided33 1 sided Functions 2 Select the function Ready to copy 10 10 L7 NN e 4 13 GB0001 01 GB0045 00 Ready to copy 10 10 L3 Original Size SE A4 ag Original Orientation Top Edge on Left pg Original Image ext Photo EcoPrint ie Off Vv Close Add Edii n Shortcul GB0002 00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Copying gt Copying Functions 4 14 5 Printing This chapter explains
100. D r T jq 1 2 Password Login Off 1 lag TIT P we me e E jy S i S Cancel Back ave Cancel S d E d Use v or AN to scroll up and down Register the user 10 10 Password Login Off Male 1 Cancel GB0645 00 Save Editing and Deleting Users User properties can be changed and users can be deleted 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List 1 1 Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization Simple Login Simple Login Setup 1 1 Off GB0435_00 GB0710 01 2 Edit or delete a user To edit a user 1 Select the user whose information you wish to edit and press Menu and then Edit 10 10 EN 10 10 EE THEN DE J ett 0 UserA 01User M 02 User C Is g O 3 Enr 03 User D 04User E 1 1 05 None Delete 07 None 2 Edit the user GB0712 01 GB0738 00 Name System Menu Counter 10 10 Input B Limit32 Name User A User User A Password Login Off Icon Male 1 4 GB0739 00 GB0057 62 User System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Name User af ser ea O O Password Login off Icon Male 1 d Select the user to use for simple log
101. Displays details for individual destinations You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search EEN 10 10 Eee 10 10 Address Book All IYiTQ v 001 r 123456 123456 e Narrow Down j002 123456 1230456789 co ad Search Name 1 1 003 123456 12345 com a Search No j004 123456 11111 com Sort Name GB0426 00 GB0396 00 e Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Use V or AN to scroll up and down Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number NOTE You may choose multiple destinations To cancel a selection press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark 3 Accept the destinations Ready to send 10 10 Address Book All E el Vi o01 nl 123456 123456 Gump 002 123456 123 456789 co 1 1 003 y 123456 12345 com lo04 123456 11111 com om OK Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 e e eo e N o a O 6 16 sending gt Specifying Destination Choosing by One Touch Key Select the destination using the One Touch Keys NOTE For more information on adding One Touch keys refer to
102. Key Address Book Ext Address Book P4 We g Folder FAX V E mail GB0055_00 2 Select the folder type 10 10 SMB Path Entry FTP Path Entry GB0103 00 e 3 Enter the destination information Input Limit64 Enter the next information Once you have entered one item press Next to advance to the next item For send to folder SMB Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to receive Up to 64 characters the data Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows Up to 128 characters For example User ScanData 6 19 sending gt Specifying Destination Data to be entered Max characters Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64 characters Domain name User name For example abcdnet james smith User name Domain name For example james smith abcdnet Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters For send to folder FTP Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder Up to 128 characters For example User ScanData Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on en
103. NZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERS TEILYLLE ALA KATSO S TEESEEN ATCRRIQSBASAOU S FAETR SARS TERI HR Rat Emm BRAO Em WTARTRe ARLEN ae LICR A e CLASS 3B 7H ajo zja E AW SEATS CORK EDSAIBL V HMNTHT E AEIBSERICD MUEWT lt EEL The label shown below is attached on the left side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT Preface gt Notice SAFETY OF LASER BEAM USA 1 Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U S DHHS Department of Health and Human Services in 1968 This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance The laser optical system enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers never permits the laser beam to escape 2 The CDRH Act A laser product related act was implemented on Aug 2 1976 by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration FDA This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U S without certification and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug 1 1976 The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be atta
104. O Media Center Extenders O Netlogon Service OOO Details Remove l Allow another program Select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox Add a port 2 p 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Check firewall status e 9 ERETLTERTTITETCE gt Control Panel Home Y Action Center e System and Security Review your computer s status and resolve issues W Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Network and Internet Restore your computer to an earlier time Hardware and Sound Programs al Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall User Accounts and Family Safety gy System Appearance and View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Tec PAS M Allow remote access Seethe name of this computer Ki Device Manager Clock Language and Region By Windows Update P A c II tSad Cla bELRLIs RAT imisi mbi 6 11 Sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Control Panel Home Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Allow a program or feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gaining access to your computer through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network Change notification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer Turn Win
105. OPERATION GUIDE ro p LL LJ C Y NS NS S SASSY Ecosrs i Introduction Thank you for your purchase of FS 3540MFP FS 3640MFP This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand sja INJULLCIXCI E 4 kancera CR KYOCE Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine frequently used operations routine maintenance and troubleshooting action Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Safety Guide FS 3540MFP FS Describes the machine installation space cautionary space and other information Be 3640MFP sure to read this guide before using the machine DVD Product Library Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting F
106. Original Width Guides 2 4 P Paper 11 10 Appropriate Paper 11 11 Before Loading 3 2 Cassette 9 7 9 8 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 8 14 Custom Paper Size 9 10 Default Paper Source 9 10 Loading Envelopes 3 11 Loading in the Cassettes 3 3 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 3 7 Media for Auto 9 10 Media Type Setting 9 10 Multi Purpose Tray 9 8 oetup 9 10 Size and Media 3 31 9 7 opecial Paper 11 14 opecial Paper Action 9 10 opecifications 11 11 Paper Feeder 11 2 Paper Feed Mode 9 16 Paper Gauge 2 2 3 6 Paper Jam Cassette 10 23 Document Processor 10 26 Duplexer 10 24 Inside the Machine 10 25 Multi Purpose Tray 10 23 Paper Jam Location 10 22 Rear Unit 10 26 Paper Length Guide 2 3 Paper Selection 3 43 Paper Size Dial 2 3 3 4 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2 3 Paper Width Guides 2 3 Part Names 2 2 PDF A 11 24 Platen 2 2 POP3 11 24 POP3 E mail RX Protocol Detail 9 19 PostScript 11 24 Power Cable Connecting 2 10 Power Cord Connector 2 4 Power Off 2 11 Power On 2 11 PPM 11 24 Precautions for Use 1 3 Preparing Cables 2 8 Preprinted Paper 11 16 Preset Limit 9 12 Printer Driver 11 24 Installing 2 13 Index 3 Printer Settings Copies 9 16 CR Action 9 16 Duplex 9 16 EcoPrint 9 16 Emulation 9 16 Form Feed TimeOut 9 16 KIR 9 17 LF Action 9 16 Orientation 9 16 Override A4 Letter 9 16 Paper Feed Mode 9 16 Resolution 9 17 Wide A4 9 16 Printing 5 1 Printing Speed 11 18 11 20 Priority Override 3 57 Q Quick Setu
107. PORATION Corporate Headquarters 6 Takeda Tobadono cho Fushimi ku Kyoto 612 8501 Japan Phone 81 75 604 3500 Fax 81 75 604 3501 www kyocera co jp X KYOCERA KBLILERd First Edition 2011 05 2MCKMENOOO
108. Ready to copy 10 10 Copies Paper ll Density 7 Selection JESES A40 Normal 0 m a a Q Duplex Combine ggg Collate gH e 1 sided gt 1 sided Off On pd Favorites GB0001 01 This function can be set while saving a file to USB memory Ready to store in Box Resolution 300x300dpi I o pn ey Density L File Name sania ab SBeny Normal 0 doc Store File Screen Cancel GB0096 00 Procedures consisting of a series of operation panel and or touch panel operations are numbered as follows E g Select Functions and then EcoPrint Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy Copies Sa H Er i gt Original Size Paper Zoom all Density Le NET i LR Selection Mg e Original Orientation A40 100 Normal 0 Si m es mo ee Mre y Original Image Duplex Combine gr Collate al 4 N ce EcoPrint 1 sided 3 1 sided Off On o Close GB0001 01 10 10 A4 Top Edge on Left Text Photo ot VY Add edit Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0002 00 Preface gt About this Operation Guide Originals and Paper Sizes This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes Icons on the Touch Panel The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on
109. Saving Control Function 1 12 Energy Star Program 1 12 Enhanced WSD 9 20 11 23 Envelopes 11 16 Envelope Switch 2 3 3 10 Environment 1 3 Error Handling 9 13 Error Messages 10 13 Expansion Memory 11 3 F Favorites 3 19 Editing and Deleting 3 23 Registering 3 19 Using 3 25 Favorites Application Application 9 15 Default Screen 9 15 File Format 3 51 File Name Entry 3 56 File Separation 6 39 First Print Time 11 18 11 20 Front Cover 2 2 FTP 11 23 FTP Client Transmission Protocol Detail 9 19 FTP Encrypted TX 6 41 FTP Server Reception Protocol Detail 9 19 Fuser Cover 2 3 G Glossary 11 22 GPL LGPL 1 9 Grayscale 3 53 11 23 H Hagaki 11 16 Handholds 2 3 2 4 Help 11 23 Help Screen 3 33 Host Name 9 17 HTTP Protocol Detail 9 19 HTTPS Protocol Detail 9 19 HTTP Security 9 21 Inner Tray 2 3 Interface Block 9 21 Internet Proxy 9 15 IP Address 11 23 oetup 9 17 IPP Protocol Detail 9 19 IPP over SSL Protocol Detail 9 19 IPP Security 9 21 IPSec Setup 9 21 Job Canceling 3 34 Checking History 8 7 Checking Status 8 2 Details of the Status Screens 8 3 Pause and Resumption 8 3 Sending the Log History 8 8 Job Accounting 9 50 Adding an Account 9 55 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9 61 Default Setting 9 64 Editing and Deleting 9 57 Enabling Disabling 9 53 Login 9 54 Logout 9 54 Printing an Accounting Report 9 63 Restricting the Use of the Machine 9 59 Job Box 5 5 Automatic Delete Setting for Tempora
110. Schiphol Rijk Phone 31 20 587 7200 Fax 31 20 587 7260 www kyoceramita nl NORWAY KYOCERA MITA Norge Olaf Helsetsvei 6 NO 0694 Oslo Phone 47 22 627 300 Fax 47 22 627 200 www kyoceramitanorge no PORTUGAL KYOCERA MITA Portugal LDA Rua do Centro Cultural 41 PT 1700 106 Lisboa Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 www kyoceramita pt SOUTH AFRICA KYOCERA MITA South Africa Pty Ltd 527 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park ZA 1685 Midrand Phone 27 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 www kyoceramita co za SPAIN KYOCERA MITA Espana S A Avda Manacor No 2 ES 28290 Las Matas Madrid Phone 34 91 631 83 92 Fax 34 91 631 82 19 www kyoceramita es SWEDEN KYOCERA MITA Svenska AB Esbogatan 16B SE 164 75 Kista Phone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 www kyoceramita se UNITED KINGDOM KYOCERA MITA UK Ltd 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OBS Phone 44 1189 311 500 Fax 44 1189 311 108 www kyoceramita co uk KYOCERA MITA WORLDWIDE JAPAN KYOCERA MITA Corporation Head Office 2 28 1 Chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 6764 3555 Fax 81 6 6764 3980 www kyoceramita com USA KYOCERA MITA America INC Head office 225 Sand Road P O Box 40008 Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 USA Phone 1 973 808 8444 Fax 1 973 882 6000 www kyoceramita com us KYOCERA CORPORATION JAPAN KYOCERA COR
111. Set the media type to load in Cassette 1 Value Plain 105 g m or less Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 10 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Cassette 2 to 4 Paper Size Description Set the paper size to load in optional paper feeders Cassette 2 to 4 Value Metric Select from A4 A5 B5 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio II Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or Custom NOTE Paper Size is only displayed when the size dial on the cassette is set to Other For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9 10 Media Type Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size Set the media type to load in optional paper feeders Cassette 2 to 4 Value Plain 105 g m or less Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 10 T
112. Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Printouts are too light Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 Have you changed the density Select appropriate density level 3 45 9 23 Is the toner distributed evenly within Shake the toner container from side to 10 2 the toner container side about several times Is there a message indicating the Replace the toner container 10 2 addition of toner Is EcoPrint mode enabled Disable EcoPrint mode 4 13 Run Drum Refresh 9 24 Make sure the media type setting is 9 7 correct the paper being used Printouts are too dark Have you adjusted the density Select appropriate density level 3 45 9 23 Run Drum Refresh 9 24 The background density is Carry out Background Density 3 49 obtrusive Adjustment Dirt on the print side of the Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document 10 7 paper processor dirty processor Dirt on the top edge or back Is the interior of the machine dirty Clean the interior of the machine 10 8 of the paper Printouts are fuzzy Is the machine being used in very Use in an environment that has 1 3 humid conditions suitable humidity Run Drum Refresh 9 24 Part of the image is Have the developer unit been loaded Load the developer unit properly periodically faint or shows properly white lines Open and then close the rear cover Run Drum Refresh 9 24 Copies have a moire pattern Is the origi
113. TE If you select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep Value 1 to 240 minutes 1 minute increments Error Clear Timer If you select On for Auto Error Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear 9 22 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance Item Description Density Adjustment Adjust density Copy Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Send Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Background Density Adj Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment Copy Auto Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Send Box Auto Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Dark
114. TER Refer to Sending E mail on page 2 22 4 Display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 lt gt System Menu Counter Q 1 E Counter pma 10 10 Admin Report Settings GB0054 00 Result Report Setting Sending Log History gt GB0560 00 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard us GB0723 00 2 Configure the function 10 10 Send Log History a i E a i Job Log poo Lom jj Auto TE GB0578 00 Refer to Setting the Destination on page 8 9 Automatic Log History Transmission on page 8 10 x Manual Log History Transmission on page 8 10 and Setting E mail Subject on page 8 11 Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History E Setting the Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter LOS Send Log History os Auto Sending 1 Off mad gt 3 1 1 Destination i E mail JUV LUY 2UDJCCLL j NE a GB0578 00 GB0581 00 2 Select the destination Select from the Address Book Searches by destination name System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10
115. WM WW NN NN NN N iara LL ME AIH N NN ANN Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vent on the right side of the machine 10 9 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving If a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page An application does not start Is the Auto Panel Reset time short Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30 9 22 seconds or more The touch panel does not Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet 2 70 respond when the main power switch is turned on Pressing the Start key does Is there a message on the touch Determine the appropriate response to 10 73 not produce copies panel the message and respond accordingly Is the machine in Sleep mode Press the Power key to recover the 2 19 machine from Sleep mode The machine will be ready to copy within 15 seconds Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet 2 70 Is the machine powered on Turn on the main power switch 2 11 Are the printer cable and network Connect the correct printer cable and 2 9 cable connected network cable securely Was th
116. Width Guides 28 Original Table 29 Original Eject Table 30 Original Stopper 31 Document Processor Open Close Handle 32 Option Interface Slot 33 USB Interface Connector 34 Network Interface Connector Indicators 35 LINE Connector 36 TEL Connector 37 Rear Cover 38 Main Power Switch 39 Power Cord Connector 40 Handholds 41 Left Cover 42 Waste Toner Box Only on products with the fax function installed 2 4 Preparation before Use gt Part Names Operation Panel System Menu Counter Displays the System Menu Counter Ends operation logs out screen on the Administration i screen Status Displays the Status Job C O Displays the Copy Puts the machine into Sleep Job Cancel Cancel screen py screen Mode Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode Lit when the machine s Favorites Displays the Favorites Sen d Displays the screen for main power is on Application screen sending When using an application displays the application screen Document Displays the Document Displays the FAX screen Box Box screen lt System Menu Counter D Ve Status Job Cancel Copy Favorites IM density Application Send Paper Tae m0 100 Normal 0 X 5 aE Combine agp late Z5 Document 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off O ee FAX sided 1 side n Function Favorites ff E bal x Quick No Clear Search Enter C 332 G gt
117. afety Information Legal and Safety Information Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited Regarding Trade Names PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation e KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Microsoft MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries e PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc IBM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U S A and or other countries e AppleTalk Bonjour Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation e UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine This machine contains the NF module dev
118. al select Trial Q IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application Appendix gt Character Entry Method Character Entry Method To enter characters for a name use the on display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below NOTE QWERTY QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard Press the System Menu Counter key Common Settings and then Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout QWERTY layout is used here as an example You may use another layout following the same steps Entry Screens Lower case Letter Entry Screen Abc GB0057 E01 Display 5 6 7 Inputs Limit32 11 12 Description Displays entered characters Keyboard Press the character to enter ABC Symbol Select the characters that are entered To enter symbols or numbers select Symbol A a a A Press to switch between upper case and lower case Cursor Key Press to move the cursor on the display Input Limit Display Displays maximum number of characters and the number of characters entered Delete Key Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor Space Key Press to insert a space Enter Key Press to enter a line break Cancel Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry was made
119. al FAX Info Local FAX Name Local FAX Info Local FAX Number Local FAX Info Local FAX ID Local FAX Info Print Position 3 Sound Volume Speaker Volume Monitor Volume 4 Rings Normal Answering Machine FAX TEL Switch 5 Redial Redial Retry Times This function is displayed when the size dial on the cassette is set to Other This function is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Only on products with the fax function installed Auto DRD is available for some countries For FAX TEL Switch this change is possible with some countries kk 1 Display the screen 10 10 System Menu Counter gt 1 5 E Counter V4 GB0054 00 2 Select a function System Menu Counter 10 10 FAX Setup Paper Setup Energy Saver Setup GB0840 00 3 31 Common Operations gt Quick Setup Wizard 3 Configure the function 10 10 Starting Setup This wizard will help you set the basic settings to use the fax GB0841_00 el Start the wizard Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings 10 10 1 Dialing RX Mode NOTE If you experience difficulty configuring the settings refer to Help Screen on page 3 33 End el Set the dialing and reception mode GB0842_00 Exits the wizard Settings configured so far are applied lt lt Previous Returns to the previous item Skip gt gt Advan
120. all contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damag
121. ame procedure to scan any remaining originals 3 41 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 4 Finish scanning Place the originals and press Start key Job No 0003 Job Name doc00000320101010101010 Scanned Pages GB0222 00 Start copying sending or storing 3 42 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Paper Selection o USB Select the cassette or multi purpose tray that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette refer to Quick Setup Wizard on page 3 31 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Paper Selection 10 10 Copies Au uem ee 1 Paper L Zoom Density X Selection LS PILAE AA J 10096 Normal 0 m u ee r gt Duplex Combine agp Collate d l sided gt gt 1 sided Off On GB0001_01 2 Select the paper source 10 10 2 2 Auto M M Plain Plain jl MIZ D A4 A4 Plain O 77 1 4J If Auto is selected the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically GB0004 00 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 and 4 Cassette 4 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed M indicates the MP tray 3 43 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Collate USB Collate the output by page Collate Scan multiple originals an
122. an to PC Address Entry wD DTA Cancel Next gt Input 20 Limit 32 GB0760 01 GB0057 82 GB0780 00 Common Operations gt Favorites Permission pa 10 10 Destination Address Book 1 Function Type Wizard e e Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users GB0781_02 GB0305_00 3 Register the favorite aa SS 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number GB0781 00 To delete LEILC U 10 10 10 10 01 Sending Job E mail Edit 1 1 ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Cancel GB0779 00 GB0782 00 3 L xx Select the favorite you wish to delete 3 24 Common Operations gt Favorites Using Favorites Call up settings from a favorite 4 Display the screen Favorites Application 2 Select a favorite 10 10 Scan to PC Addre ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy ss Entry C us EJ V EJ V EJ V Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A Scan to E mail A SS Book ddress Entry Il ddress Book Menu Application When using the wizard mode GB0056 00 1 The registered screens are displayed in order Make the desired settings Set Combine 10 10 8 e m E a P O Adjust the density 10 10 8 oo 2in1 2 ii a Lighter Normal Darker OT Others Input
123. aracters If entering the name a DNS server address must also be configured The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP IP General tab SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters 2 22 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail Login Password Description When Other is selected for Authenticate the password set here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters POP before SMTP Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds when you have selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is 0 no maximum size is set Sender Address Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine adminis
124. ation selected on the list Enter the license key as necessary Deactivate Deactivates the application selected on the list Print Report Prints information on the installed applications The Application Name ID Application ID Version and other information can be checked Delete Internet Deletes the application selected on the list This procedure sets up the Internet browser application Description Specify the proxy settings Value Off On Use Same Proxy Set whether or not the same proxy server is used for all protocols If the same proxy server is not used select Off Value Off On HTTP Proxy Server Set a proxy server HTTP Value Enter the proxy address and port number HTTPS Proxy Server Set a proxy server HTTPS Value Enter the proxy address and port number No Proxy Domains Set domains for which no proxy is used Value Enter the domain name Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Printer Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine Item Description Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Value Line Printer IBM Proprinter DIABLO 630 EPSON LQ 850 PCL6 KPDL KPDL Auto Alt
125. automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No can also be set Value File Name Up to 32 characters can be entered Additional Info None Date and Time Job No Job No amp Date and Time Date and Time amp Job No E mail Subject Body Set the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned originals by E mail Value Subject Up to 60 characters can be entered Body Up to 500 characters can be entered FTP Encrypted TX Set the default value for document encryption during transmission Value Off On NOTE This setting is displayed when the secure protocol SSL setting is On JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size resolution when printing JPEG or TIFF file Value Paper Size Image Resolution Print Resolution XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function Value Off On Detail Settings Image Quality Set the default value for the image quality adjustment range when selecting the file format with which to send and store images Value 1 Low High Comp 2 3 4 5 High Low Comp Set the default value for PDF A when selecting the file format with which to send and store images Value Off PDF A 1a PDF A 1b f you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Preset Limit Item Descrip
126. by entering the address directly Copies page 4 2 Paper Selection page 3 43 Zoom page 4 5 Density page 3 45 Duplex page 4 7 Combine page 4 70 Collate page 3 44 Functions Original Size page 3 37 Original Orientation page 3 38 Original Image page 3 47 EcoPrint page 4 73 Sharpness page 3 48 Background Density Adj page 3 49 Continuous Scan page 3 47 Job Finish Notice page 3 54 File Name Entry page 3 56 Priority Override page 3 57 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 27 Send One Touch Key page 6 17 Address Book page 6 15 Ext Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide E mail page 6 78 Folder page 6 79 FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide WSD Scan page 6 42 Functions File Format page 3 57 Original Size page 3 37 Original Orientation page 3 38 Duplex page 3 39 Sending Size page 6 37 File Separation page 6 39 Scan Resolution page 3 46 Density page 3 45 Color Selection page 3 53 Original Image page 3 47 Sharpness page 3 48 Background Density Adj page 3 49 FAX TX Resolution refer to Fax Operation Guide Zoom page 3 50 Continuous Scan page 3 47 File Name Entry page 3 56 E mail Subject Body page 6 40 Job Finish Notice page 3 54
127. c N uM OR Selection al Priority Override A40 100 Normal 0 m es ro m C Duplex Combine gj Collate me gt 1 sided Off On GB0001_01 GB0002_02 Add Edi Shortcu p Use V or AN to scroll up and down Scan to USB 10 10 D ge uui NENNEN 753 File Duplex Scan T Format LJ Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi e 1s wes ers all Density L File Name C ab SBenry Normal 0 Functions GB0096 00 Cancel Input 3 D 1 Limit32 e zixic vibininm Up to 32 characters can be entered GB0057 06 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters X 3 Add other information Ready to copy 10 10 None Use V or AN to scroll up and down Date and Time Job No Job No amp Date and Time GB0068_00 Cancel lt Back 3 56 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Priority Override Suspend the current job and give a new job top priority The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished NOTE This function is not available if current job was an override Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage 4 Display the screen 2 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Priority Override Ready to
128. ce eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 6 1 slesBerus e 6 2 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC ssessssssssssseseseee nennen 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Host Name ccccceccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeeees 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Login User Name eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 6 6 Creating a Shared Folder ccccccccsecceecceeecceecceeeceeecceeceaeeceesaeeesaeesseeseeesseeeseeeseess 6 7 Checking WAG IP AUN srein E E EEE OEA EEE 6 10 Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 sees 6 11 Specifying Destination mM E 6 15 Choosing from the Address Book cccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeseeeaeeeaeeeees 6 15 Choosing by One Touch Key ccccccccseccceecceeeceeecaeecceeeceeceecaueesaeecueesaueceessaeseas 6 17 Entering a New E mail Address ccccccceecccececeeecseceececeeeceueceueeseeesuecaueseaeeseeesas 6 18 Specifying a New PC Folder seeessssssesseeseeeeneee nennen nennen nnn nnne 6 19 Checking and Editing Destinations cee cccccecec cece eeeaeeeaeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeesaneees 6 22 sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 6 23 Registering Destinations in the Address Book
129. ce such as glossy paper used for calendars 11 16 Appendix gt Paper Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality 11 17 Appendix gt Specifications Specifications Q IMPORTANT Specifications are subject to change without notice Machine Item Description Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser single drum system Supported Original Types Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size Folio Legal Original Feed System Fixed Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 120 g m Duplex 60 to 120 g m Multi Purpose Tray 60 to 220 g m Media Type Cassette Plain Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Multi Purpose Tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Cassette Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 A4 Duplex 8 1 2 x 14 A4 Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A6 Duplex 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 A5 Multi Purpose Tray Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 A4 Minimum 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 A6 Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Fixed magnifications 400
130. cel GB0441_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Local Authorization is displayed when selecting On for Local User Authorization Refer to Local User Authorization on page 9 33 N 3 Register the user System Menu Counter 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password FORK Account Name Others Cancel GB0441_00 To delete System Menu Counter M4 Admin Admin a y i DeviceAdmin 4000 2 User A User A o o E i o a o el Select the user you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE Also you can delete the user by selecting the user press Menu and then Delete 9 37 GB0839_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Simple Login The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name Users must be registered in advance to use this functionality For details refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 Simple Login Settings Enable simple login 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization 1 1 Off GB0435_00 2 Enable simple login 10 10 10 10 Simple Login Off Off Simple Login Setup L7 NP ta GB0711 00 GB0710
131. ces to the next item without setting the current item Next gt Advances to the next screen lt Back Returns to the previous screen Finish Register the settings and exit the wizard 3 32 Common Operations gt Help Screen Help Screen If you have difficulty operating the machine you can check how to operate it using the touch panel When the help is displayed on the touch panel you can press it to display the Help screen How to read the screen Help titles Displays information about functions and machine operation Closes the Help screen and returns to the original screen Paper Selection Ready to copy 10 10 1E 2 z A4 D A4 D Plain Plain SEI aJ ME A4 P A4 E A4 D Plain Plain Plain E c O Ready to copy 10 10 Select the cassette or multi purpose tray with the desired paper size Auto Automatically selects the appropriate paper size Cassette 1 Selects the paper in cassette 1 Cassette 2 Selects the paper in cassette 2 Cassette 3 Selects the paper in cassette 3 Scrolls up and down when the help text cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen GH0001_00 3 33 Common Operations gt Canceling Jobs Canceling Jobs Cancel any print or send job being executed 1 Press the Stop key Stop 2 Cancel a job When there is a job is being scanned _ mom BEI NENNEN am um um um Scanned Pages
132. ched to laser products marketed in the United States On this machine the label is on the right FS 3540MFP MFP EHEEHEHEEEHEEEEERNI FS 3640MFP MFP EHEEEHEEEEEEEEENI 3 Optical unit When checking the optical unit avoid direct exposure to the laser beam which is invisible Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit 4 Maintenance DANGER CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSES3 ERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET N B LAS NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZE ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B ONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA RADIAZI EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN ZF mABKAtMH mM FWAETRSAREH TREE IE RRS eee eee zz AB Ey aE AIO AH CLASS 3B 7HIA aoaia AQ Babel CCAS C72 A3BL U XDC amp 8 C 4AEEBERICD fiAiiUgUYC ER For safety of the service personnel follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual 5 Safety switch The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened 1 5 Preface gt Notice Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Caution The power plug is the
133. creen Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 52 display the screen 3 Print reports 10 10 Job Accounting Print Accounting Report 1 2 l otal Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_02 9 63 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Default Setting Sets default settings related to job accounting Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 52 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Apply Limit Subsequently Individual 1 1 Accounting List Default Setting gt GB0461_01 GB0481_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Setting Items Description Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction Value Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message Copier Printer Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 59 Counting the Number of A Pages Printed on page 9 61 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 9 63 for details Value T
134. cted he hub is not operating properly e he server is not operating properly 3201 Failed to send the e mail Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient 10 20 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Corrective Actions Reference Page Turn the main power switch off and back on If this error occurs several times make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative 10 21 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs the touch panel will display Paper jam and the machine will stop Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper How to read the screen 10 10 Paper jam Open cassette 1 and remove paper Set cassette 1 Displays the current step Displays the processing method GE0001 00 Back Returns to the previous step Next gt Advances to the next step Hold Puts the current step on hold and switchs to the Status screen The status of jobs can be checked Refer to Checking Job Status on page 8 2 Paper Jam Location Detailed paper jam positions are as follows Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam Paper Jam Description Reference Location Page Clear the paper jammed in the multi purpose 10 23 tray Clear the paper jammed in cassette 10 23 Clear the paper jammed in duplexer 10 24 Clear th
135. cted as the file format 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen Send Ready to send 10 10 EEE ae Dest 0 Recall Check File Format LY original SIZe X 2 A4 C One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book ve 2 E GriaInslforen tation E a ee MM Edge on Left Duplex 1 sided Close Add Edil Shortcu Use V or A to scroll up and down i E mail Folder FAX M GB0055 00 GB0081 00 Scan to USB Ready to store in Box 10 10 LS Resolution 1 sided 300x300dpi 1 NE Density Le File Name mined abf Entry Normal 0 doc Functions Cancel GB0096 00 3 51 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the file format PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS Ready to send 10 10 gt BH g d oO Others 4 Ready to send 10 10 JPEG Others Cancel GB0082 00 2 Select the file format Ready to send 10 10 File Format 1mage Quality GB0698 00 3 Setthe image quality 10 10 PDF GB0698 00 4 Set PDF A 10 10 File Format GB0698_00 3 52 Ready to send TIE TIFF JPEG XPS Cancel 10 10 F 1 1 L7 NEP Ready to send el 10 10 GB0145_00 GB0083_00 GB0699 00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Color Selection Select the color m
136. d The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 19 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information refer to Duplex on page 4 7 Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has earned the ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR Preface gt About this Operation Guide About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter Preface Contents Includes information about operating precautions trademarks and this manual Preparation before Use Provides information about part names connecting cables and setting up and configuring the machine Common Operations Explains overall machine operation including loading paper and originals and logging in and out Copying Describes the functions you can use when copying Printing Provides information about functionality that is available when using the machin
137. d Pages Scanned Pages Printer Total LINER Copy Print Total 333 111 GB0463_00 GB0464_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down To reset the counter 10 10 Scanned Pages MM FAX TX Pages Counter Reset GB0463_00 9 62 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered Copier Printer Count Format When Total is selected for Copier Print Total Total number of pages used for copying and printing Printer Count When Individual is selected for Copier Copy Total number of pages used for copying Printer Count Print Total number of pages used for printing Shared statistics Scan Total number of pages scanned Total number of pages scanned for copying Total number of pages faxed Total number of other pages scanned Total number of pages received Total number of pages sent Total duration of fax transmissions Total number of duplex pages printed Total number of 1 sided pages printed Total number of combine 2 in 1 pages Total number of combine 4 in 1 pages Total number of non combine pages printed 4 Prepare paper Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette 2 Display the s
138. d deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Collate Ready to copy s 10 10 copy i Copies Paper A Zoom all Density TW Selection DPI A4 10090 Normal 0 m M Duplex 2 1 sided 1 sided Off GB0001 01 2 Select the function Ready to copy 10 10 o o A o o a o NE e 3 44 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Density Adjust density using 7 levels x lt 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Copy Scan to USB 10 10 10 10 g p _ Paper LN Zoom il Density U File Duplex Scan Selection T9 Format LS A Resolution A40 100 Normal 0 PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi m uud o ee X C i mmm e Duplex 3 Combine il Density L File Name L zl compu a Entry 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off Normal 0 Functions A Favorites s Functions GB0096 00 Cancel GB0001 01 Send Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 EN Dest 0 J Check Sending Size Recall l i Same as Original Size File Separation dis One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book gt Scan Resolution dpi em
139. d information as needed Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Sending Job E mail Input 20 n E Limit 32 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending 1 2 Number Auto Owner Admin GB0766_00 GB0057_81 e Number Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending 1 2 Number Auto Owner Admin 1 d Permission 00 20 GB0766_00 GB0760 00 10 10 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Destination Address Book 1 Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users t GB0305 00 GB0766 02 Destination Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Eas 10 10 Permission Private Address Book Ext Address Book s 1 2 Functions One Touch Key Function Type Wizard Address Entry E mail V4 GB0766 02 GB0771 00 el When the job type is Send or FAX selects the Destination Recall Method 3 21 Common Operations gt Favorites Functions Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Destination Address Book Function Type Wizard 1 e GB0766 02 EE T INN T 10 10 V File Format PDF v Original Size A42 1 6 _ Original Orientation Top Edge on Left m Duplex 1 sided e e ce N N eo a Oo If you selected wizard mode check
140. display the screen Ready to send uu 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 x EN Dest 0 Check y Sending Size Recall j check ae Same as Original Size a t p amp File Separation dis 2 Off One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book gt a Scan Resolution ed we a LUE Ww Density E mail Folder FAX lw o um Normal 0 e E y Favorites B Close Add Edi dq Shortut J Ez Use v or A to scroll up and down 2 Select the sending size Same as Original Size 10 10 Metric gt Inch gt Others gt GB0071 00 L7 NE L d 6 37 sending gt Sending Functions Metric inch or Others 10 10 g a d Select the desired size 6 38 GB0071 00 Ready to send 10 10 Cancel Back Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0072 00 sending gt Sending Functions File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files e NOTE Three digit serial number such as abc_001 pdf abc_002 pdf is attached to the end of the file name 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen _ 10 10 10 10 Se ee Dest 0 j 7 Check sy Sending Size Recall j Check Gat Same as Oriainal Size NE wo we amp File Separation m Off One Touch One Touch Key Address Book Book Ext Addre
141. ditional information Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference IMPORTANT Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems Q IMPORTANT Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it CAUTION A CAUTION Preface gt About this Operation Guide Job types for which each function can be set are shown with icons Description This function can be set while copying a document Ready to copy Paper Selection A4 Normal 0 9 m unm 0 r ul Duplex g Collate li L 4 1 sided gt gt 1 sided On pd Favorites Copy Screen all Density GB0001 01 Description This function can be set while printing from USB memory 10 10 Copies 1 ur EEEEEENENNNN f S Paper ggg Collate C p 4 On 1 sided Duplex 7 Selection A4 D GB0097 00 Print Screen Cancel This function can be set while sending a document Ready to send i EN 10 10 Dest 0 Check One Touch Key Recall Address Book Ext Address Book 1 2 ss FAX E mail Folder Vv ss Functions Send Screen vv Favorites GB0055 00 In this guide steps where touch panel keys are used are outlined in red E g Select Zoom
142. do Select the file format for images being sent Reference Page File Format gt page 3 51 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 37 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 38 Automatically scan 2 sided originals Duplex page 3 39 Change the size of the image being sent Sending Size page 6 37 Send each page in a separate file File Separation page 6 39 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution P page 3 46 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 45 Change the color mode for images being sent Color Selection page 3 53 Select original image type for best results Original Image gt page 3 47 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness 5 page 3 48 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 49 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending size Zoom page 3 50 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 41 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry page 3 56 Add an E mail subject and body when sending E mail E mail Subject Body page 6 40 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice
143. dows Firewall on or What are network locations E Restore default d Home or work private networks Connected Networks at home or work where you know and trust the people and devices on the network IIUUUICSIIUUL Ty network Windows Firewall state On Incoming connections Block all connections to programs that are not on the list of allowed programs 3 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security File Action View Help e gt 0E mo Advance n Connection Security Rules d Windows Firewall with Advanced Security provides network security for Windows computers amp Import Policy b Monitoring 4m Export Policy __ BR Restore Default Policy Domain Profile Diagnose Repair QU Windows Firewall is on View gt 98 Inbound connections that do not match a rule are blocked o Outbound connections that do not match a rule are allowed Private Profile is Active QU Windows Firewall is on ES E 5 m E a B raon rara aasa File Action View Help zs Windows Firewall with Advance E3 Inbound Rules E3 Outbound Rules Bu Connection Security Rules Lol Inbound Rules i Name Group Profile Enabled Action o BranchCache Content Retrieval HTTP In BranchCache Content Retr All Allow Q connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Domain Allow
144. dress 10 10 Input 11 Limit128 E mail Address AN Access Level User My Panel Local Authorization i d Access Level System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 E mail Address 1 My Panel GB0446 01 GB0057 30 Administrator User Local Authorization m Select the user access privilege GB0446 01 GB0443 00 L7 NEP t 9 31 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration My Panel 10 10 10 10 E mail Address Access Level My Panel Local Authorization Language English Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut GB0446 01 O For details on My Panel refer to My Panel on page 9 34 N Local Authorization System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 E mail Address Access Level User Printer FAX Transmission Cancel ave Cancel GB0446 01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Change the limitations as needed 4 Register the user Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password ena A A Et Account Name Others GB0446 00 9 32 GB0749 00 GB0839 00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Local User Authorization Enables local user authorization Job use can be prohibited for specific users Set when adding a user See page 9 29 or editing and deleting users
145. e N AA NN W W NW ANNAN ANY AN WN ANIKI NN NV N NN W W A NN NN N NN N Open the top cover and front cover and lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine UN Podio ENE FEAA Q IMPORTANT Be careful not to touch the drum as this may adversely affect print quality If you cannot find a paper jam try checking inside the rear of the machine NOTE If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers pull it along the normal running direction of the paper WM NN ANI W NN WS NW AK A AN NN W N NN NN M NNN N NN NN NN W WW N W N 10 25 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Rear Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the rear unit hn 7 rmm NU T Jm 7 EL gu DS ua A Ni Cy n y A CAUTION The fuser unit inside the machine is hot Do not touch it with your hands as it may result in burn injury Remove jammed paper carefully Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to remove proceed to the next step 10 26 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams 10 27 Troubleshooting gt Cleari
146. e Speech Startup Disk Time Machine X Universal Controls Update Access P id Click the lock to prevent further changes Q 2 Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection and then enter the IP address and printer name 0 Add Printer Address 192 168 48 21 Valid and camniete address Queue m Leave blank for default queue Name 192 168 48 21 3 Print Using amp smaem i s J mcm 4 3 Select the options available for the machine and click Continue Installable Options 192 168 48 21 Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here so you can take full advantage of them For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the documentation that came with it Paper Feeders Not Installed 1 Optional Disk Not Installed 3 4 The selected machine is added aan Print amp Fax 192 168 47 21 192 168 47 21 Idle Last Used Adobe PDF 7 0 oe o paused i Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Location Kind Po sai a Status Idle Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used Me Default paper size A4 i 1 Click the lock to prevent further changes k the lock furth Q 2 16 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Setting TWAIN Driver Register this machine to
147. e as a printer Sending Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Setup Registration and User Management Explains system menu functionality related to overall machine operation job accounting and user management Troubleshooting Explains how to respond to error indications such as when the machine runs out of toner and problems such as paper jams Appendix Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen Press the Start key Regular Indicates the touch panel keys Press OK Italic Indicates a message displayed on the touch panel Ready to copy is displayed For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 19 NOTE Used to emphasize a key word phrase or references to ad
148. e first user login administration For details about the configuration method refer to User Login Settings on page 9 26 1 Enable user login administration System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings 1 1 gt Local User Authorization Off GB0435 00 2 Add a user System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login AC Ji i Admin Admin A 7 tj DeviceAdmin 4000 GB0440_00 d 3 Log out Logout 4 The registered user logs in for operations Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard GB0723 00 a 9 25 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Login Settings 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down in gt System Menu Counter Be mene d 1 f Address Book One Touch 2 fa user Loginrsob accountng OOOO hum mmm 00000 Accounting Bue BU v Menu Counter 10 10 User Login EIL MEE NN Job Accounting l Unknown ID Job Reject GB0054_03 GB0434_00 NOTE You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 for the default login user name and password Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard e e co N N O a o el 2 Configure the function System Menu Counte
149. e kit and follow the removal procedures in reverse to install 10 6 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality A CAUTION For safety always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent NOTE Do not use organic solvents or other strong chemicals Document Processor If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth NOTE Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 10 7 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning 2 Wipe the white guide Machine To avoid print quality problems the interior of the machine must be cleaned with every toner container and waste toner box replacement 1 Wipe the registration roller Jj qM CAL TN VES g Ss lt p gt S Are bp a To WWW WN AW N AN Lex ot tt iud I EA Fd mm Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the registration roller metal 10 8 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning c YY NN ANN NN N NN N NW NN NN NN NN WW N Hy iI Hy Ji SS ii p LL W
150. e machine powered on before Power on the machine after 2 9 the printer cable was connected connecting the printer cable Is the print job paused Resume printing 8 3 Blank sheets are ejected Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen 3 12 place them face down and align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the 3 14 document processor place them face up Check that the application software is correctly operated Paper often jams Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly 3 2 Is the paper of the supported type Is it Remove the paper turn it over and 3 2 in good condition reload it Is the paper curled folded or wrinkled Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 Are there any loose scraps or jammed Remove any jammed paper 10 22 paper in the machine Printouts are wrinkled or Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 curled Documents are printed Are the application software settings at Check that the printer driver and improperly the PC set properly application software settings are set properly Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host 9 21 memory USB memory not recognized settings 10 10 Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions
151. e management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Enhanced WSD Kyocera s proprietary web services Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages The machine emulates operation of PCL6 KPDL and KPDL automatic FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to transfer files on the TCP IP network whether the Internet or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits Help A Help key is provided on this machine s operation panel If you are unsure of how to operate the machine would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel IP Address An Internet p
152. e may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 and 495 seconds Value 5 to 495 seconds LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code character code OAH Value LF Only LF and CR Ignore LF CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH Value CR Only LF and CR Ignore CR Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified Value Auto Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type Fixed Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Description Resolution Set the resolution used for printing Value 600 dpi Fast1200 The machine is equipped with the smoothing function which realizes an excellent output resolution of about 2400 dpi x 600 dpi Value Off On System Configures machine system settings Network Configures network settings Host Name Item Description HostNam Check the host name of the machine TCP IP Settings Description TCP IP Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Value Off On IPv4 Settings Set up TCP IP IPv4 t
153. e of a non shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device contains the module which complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS Gen of IC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted Other precautions for users in California the United States This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 6 Preface gt Notice Warranty the United States FS 3540MFP FS 3640MFP MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY Kyocera Mita America Inc and Kyocera Mita Canada Ltd both referred to as Kyocera warrant the Customer s new Multifunctional Product referred to as MFP and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one 1 year or 300 000 copies prints
154. e paper jammed inside the machine 10 25 Clear the paper jammed in the rear unit 10 26 Clear the paper jammed in the document 10 26 processor Precautions with Paper Jams Do not reuse jammed papers e Ifthe paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine e Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming A CAUTION The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 10 22 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray Open and close the top cover and front cover to clear the error NOTE If the paper cannot be removed do not try to forcefully remove it Go to paper jam inside the machine on page 10 25 Cassette Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette Check to see if paper is loaded correctly If not reload the paper NOTE If the paper cannot be removed do not try to forcefully remove it Go to paper jam inside the machine on page 10 25 10 23 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Duplexer Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplexer 1 RR MMM LMM oe HE HY 10 24 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Inside the Machine Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the machin
155. e re I A ee en ee 10 8 SOMA IVIGINUITIGUOING 10 10 Responding to Error Messages cccscccseeceeeceeeceueceueecueeceeceueceeeseesceeesseeesaeesaeessessaeees 10 13 Clearing Paper JaN RR RR mm 10 22 PaperdJam Localo 10 22 WIIG P rpose Tray RRRRRRRRRRERE 10 23 Ee EE c 9 10 23 Bel E 10 24 WISIGO Me WMIACHWING E 10 25 acri qe 10 26 Document PrOGOSSOF ui ss rati tun vote tia tase tee egeo ana bv tam ped dE Ru Epor Uis E aai 10 26 11 Peleo ere 11 1 Goutfegciisie e agi n T st eeeevonguat es 11 2 Overview of Optional Equipment seesssessssssesseeenneen nennen nnns 11 2 Paper OCIS 11 2 EXDANSIONIVMICMIONY m 11 3 Card Authentication KIL 11 4 IS ING VON M 11 4 Seleuci M c 11 5 Character Entry 11 7 ENUY eo gt M NET QU NOTTE 11 7 VOTING CMW ACION Ss NP EET 11 9 xoa pec 11 10 Basic Paper Specifications cccceccssccceecceseceeecseeceeeceecueesaeeseeeseeesseeseeeseeenegees 11 11 Choosing
156. ecking Job Status Send Job Status screen Display Key Status Job Cancel 10 10 0005 pili 0123456 GB0183 00 LIE 1 2 3 4 6 Icons that indicate the job type B Sending Job FAX ed Sending Job Folder SMB FTP Sending Job E mail M Sending Job Application a Sending Job Mixed Multiple 2 Menu Pressing this key displays Priority Override This function allows you to give a particular fax job priority Select the fax job you wish to send immediately and then press Menu followed by Priority Override 3 Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key 4 Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information 5 Status of job 5 Sending Z Sending Waiting A job for which immediate transmission was specified is waiting for transmission to start Ll Pausing the job or error Canceling the job E The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals 6 Close NOTE Closes the Send Job Status screen FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Store Job Status screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0016 pili doc0000162010082913 e GB0184 00 Display Key Details 1 Icons that indicate the job type i4 Storing Job Scan m Storing Job Printer B Storing Job FAX W 2
157. ect paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document Selecting Rotate will print the document rotated 180 7 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 5 3 Printing gt Printing from Applications 3 Start printing Print Name G uaBropertios Status Error 1 documents waiting Comments and Forms Type Document and Markups Print Range Preview Composite di K 210 02 3 Current view Subset All pages in range Reverse pages Page Handli Copies 1 Collate 297 01 Page Scaling Shrink to Printable Area 2 V Auto Rotate and Center Choose paper source by PDF page size Print to fi Units mm Zoom 96 int to file Click OK button NOTE Click the tabs on the print settings screen and configure the print settings as necessary For more information refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide Printing Using Half Speed Mode When printing on a paper with a smooth surface or thick paper adjust the printing speed using the printer driver For details refer to Printer Driver Operation Guide Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help To learn more about print settings display the printer driver print settings screen and display Help using either of the methods explained below Lae Orientation Collate vint on both Multiple pages EcoPrint sides per sheet Click the bu
158. ed Letterhead Envelope Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adjust Print Direction to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important select Speed Priority Example copying on Letterhead P Original Paper Finished Cassette d Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray Value Adjust Print Direction Speed Priority Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Media Type Setting Each media type s default weight is indicated Media Type Plain Normal 2 Media Type Cardstock Heavy 3 Transparency Extra Heavy Color Normal 3 Rough Normal 3 Prepunched Normal 2 Vellum Light Letterhead Normal 3 Labels Heavy 1 Thick Heavy 3 Recycled Normal 2 Envelope Heavy 3 Preprinted Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2 Bond Normal 3 Custom 1 8 Normal 2 For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed Custom 1 8 Description Select the setting for duplex Value Prohibit Permit Function Defaults Item Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more
159. ed gt gt 1 sided Prints 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 2 sided to 2 sided Binding in Original If you choose a 2 sided sheet original select the binding gt edge of the originals g Binding in Finishing If you choose a 2 sided copy select the binding edge of the f 25 A A finished copies Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction This item is not displayed when 1 sided gt gt 1 sided is selected NOTE The paper sizes supported in Two sided to Two sided are Letter Legal Executive Statement Oficio Il A4 A5 BS and Folio 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Copying gt Copying Functions Ready to copy 10 10 T ee cre Jl Paper A Zoom il Density Selection Ea D 10096 Normal 0 e Duplex gg Collate ad 1 sided 1 sided On Functions 2 Select the function Pd Favorites GB0001 01 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Ready to copy 10 10 1 sided gt gt 1 sided g 9 Others 1 Ready to copy 1 sided 1 sided g 9 2 sided 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Others 1 sided 2 cided Others er d 2 sided 1 sided 10 10 2 sided 1 sided
160. egister when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver 1 Display the screen 1 Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner in Program and File Search Click View scanners and cameras in the search list 2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers and press the Properties If you do not see your device in the list make sure it is connected to the computer and turned on then choose Refresh Refresh Add Device J l Scan Profiles lj Proper ies Do I need to use this to install my scanner or camera 2 Configure WIA Driver Scanner Authentication Enter the machine name OTe 3 When using SSL select the aa 3 4 checkbox beside SSL When user login administration is enabled select the checkbox beside Authentication and enter Login User Name up to 64 characters and Password up to 64 characters When job accounting is enabled select the checkbox beside Account ID and enter the account ID as many as eight digits NOTE Enter the scanner address when the device and computer are connected via a network Preparation before Use gt Energy Saver function Energy Saver function Sleep and Auto Sleep Power C To enter Sleep press the Power key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator This status
161. eloped by ACCESS Co Ltd This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group e ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide GPL LGPL This product contains GPL http www gnu org licenses gpl html and or LGPL http www gnu org licenses lgpl html software as part of its firmware You can get the source code and you are permitted to copy redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL LGPL For further information including availability of the source code visit http www kyoceramita com gpl Open SSL License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 1 9 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product incl
162. emovable Memory can be safely removed is displayed press OK and remove the USB memory NOTE USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device For details refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 12 N 7 8 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Functions for Document Box Print or Store file screen in Document Box shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use v or A to select the function When printing from USB memory What do you want to do Reference Page Specify the paper size and type Paper Selection gt page 3 43 Collate the output documents in page order Collate gt page 3 44 Print on both sides of the paper Duplex page 7 10 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice gt page 3 54 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority Priority Override page 3 57 Password protect a PDF file Encrypted PDF Password P page 7 11 Set the image size resolution when printing a JPEG or TIFF file JPEG TIFF Print gt page 7 12 Print an XPS file so that it fits the paper size XPS Fit to Page page 7 13 When storing a document to USB memory What do you want to do Reference Page Select the file format for images being stored File Format page 3 51 Automatically scan 2 sided originals Duplex page 3 39 Set the resolu
163. er Toner Save Level EcoPrint Set the toner saving level when using EcoPrint Copy Lowers or raises the toner saving level during copying Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Printer Lowers or raises the toner saving level during printing Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Print Density Adjust print density Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white Value 5 B amp W 4 3 2 1 Color Correcting Black Line Correct fine lines streaks caused by contamination which may appear on the image when the document processor is used Value Off No correction performed On Low Correction performed The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using Off On High Select this item if a streak remains after using On Low The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using On Low Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel Value 1 Darker 2 3 4 Lighter 9 23 Setup Registration and User Management g
164. er 10 10 ae 10 10 liza Sales department 1 Narrow Down Sales department 1 abc e gt Search Name p 1 1 2 i gt Support department 0234567 e gt Search No Sort Name e Support department BOX Gm gt I N GB0429_00 GB0396_00 IC z Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Use V or AN to scroll up and down Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number Enter the One Touch Key name System Menu Counter 10 10 Address Book All EVA liga Sales department 1 0123456 Sales department 1 Input 18 Limit 24 ABC w MESE ajlw e n 7r v e o A s r e LI iz xic vie n w Cancel Back Nex gt Sales department 1 abc ew gt 1 2 lt gt Support department 0234567 ew gt Support department BOX 1 ew gt V Up to 24 characters can be entered GB0057 18 OO GB0429 00 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Register the destination System Menu Counter 10 10 Name Sales department 1 FAX Number 0123456 Sub Address TX Start Speed 33600bps a GB0754 00 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Editing and Deleting One
165. er dust We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 8096 pulp i e not more than 2096 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers 11 11 Appendix gt Paper Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 Multi Purpose Tray B6 186 x 128 mm Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray A4 297 x 210 mm Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 A5 210 x 148 mm
166. er where the file will be stored and press Menu and then Store File S N AVUN W N NN ANN Nel NS NV NN O For details refer to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB N Memory on page 7 2 or Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 5 NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Select the functions LE select the functions to use aa a Press Functions to display all the functions Sern JL em MU 10096 Normal 0 Refer to Common Functionality on page 3 36 um ENNNNNEEEEENNI leap 3 E Duplex Combine agp coate 4 1 sided 1 sided Off On GB0001 01 3 35 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Common Functionality Functionality related to originals What do you want to do Specify the original size Reference Page Original Size gt page 3 37 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 38 Automatically scan 2 sided originals Duplex page 3 39 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 41 Functionality related to document quality What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Reference Page Paper Selection gt page 3 43 Collate the output doc
167. ering Destinations in the Address BOOK sssssssssssssssssssssseee nennen nennen nnn esee snae nnn n is 6 24 PROGINS OPAC NR T m 6 24 Adna AOUD c 6 28 Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries esses nemen 6 31 Adding a Destination on One Touch Key sssssssssesssesseee nennen nnne nnne ases ese saai asa esas essa asa sanas 6 33 PROGINS uarie Me e 6 33 Editing and Deleting One Touch Key 5 eret nt rane Ron poma mel Cen F e esa Es gve ets Dn DES aeu cover esvs sa soe era eaaa 6 35 wicaeliqsdm neon P 6 36 NI eiae AG RN NT T 6 37 aulis elc ers pz i10 E ct 6 39 zb sns Mee 6 40 BU EGO P 6 41 WV SCAM 6 42 Scanning USING TVALI U 6 45 6 1 sending gt Basic Operation Basic Operation This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the network In order to do this it is necessary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send e mail It is recommended that a Local Area Network LAN be used to as
168. erna EA E A 9 50 gtzimeepiteeeiininmi ijc 9 50 JOD ACCOUNTING Settings RR 9 52 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting cccccecccceecceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeseesaeees 9 53 OOM OG OUR cir r e 9 54 Adding an AG COUN T 9 55 Editing and Deleting Accounts ccccesccsseceseecseeceeeccueecueecaeeeeeeeseeesseesaeesaueesaeess 9 57 Restricting the Use of the Machine ccc ceccccecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeeeseeees 9 59 Counting the Number of Pages Printed seeeeeseseseseseneeenenne 9 61 Printing an Accounting Report sssesssesssssssseseeeneeen ener nnn nnne 9 63 Job Accounting Default Setting eesssesssseseesseeenennem nennen 9 64 Unknown Login User Name Job seessesssesseeeeneen nennen nnne nnne nnns 9 65 10 MP OUDICS OO UNG ctt 10 1 Toner Container Replacement ccccsscccecccseeceecceeeeceeeceeeceaeccaeeseesueesaeesueesaeessuesegeeeas 10 2 Waste Toner Box Replacement ccccccccsccceeecceeceeecceeeceecaueecaeeceecaueceueceueesueesauesseeenaes 10 4 Replacing the Maintenance Kit MIK 370 cccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseseseeeeseneeseneeseeeaaaes 10 6 MRS AMINO EE 10 7 Gase RIAT EET er en eee eee eee ene 10 7 D cu ument PIOCCSS OM RTT TETTE 10 7 Men E e
169. es caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement 10 You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging 11 Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement Preface gt Legal and Safety Information Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with energy saving functionality for automatically transitioning to Sleep to minimize power consumption after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute have passed since the device was last use
170. estination 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Specifying Destination on page 6 15 specify the destination Ready to send 10 10 Se ae r a One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book NW Vv E mail Folder GB0055 02 Check and edit the destination Deletes the selected destination 10 10 Adds a new destination BBB bbb abc com Scrolls up and down when the list of destinations cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen GB0105 00 Displays details for the destinations New E mail addresses and PC folders can be edited if they have been specified 6 22 sending gt Specifying Destination Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or FTP and fax numbers This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending to different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability No of broadcast items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 5 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 100 Also depending on the settings you can send and print at the same time Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch trans
171. esuueseeecaeesaeecsuesaueesaeesseesenesaaeeges Replacing the Maintenance Kit MK 370 c ccccccssscecceseeceseccceececceueeseugeesseuseesaueeesegeesseseesaueeessageessensessags qq M MASS ilc iic DRE TU Nn DOCUMENT a 100 o MR RETE ueni pem wineliei Jc Responding to Error MesSaOBS cossonar ae na E ea E a aE paea EE Ear ETE EAS Gcaneigo d qe m um EMecuoM e E M UB Ae UGS OSS TAY PE g cca lp ETT BWolcgMm A DSe ME Ma CMNO f aic gU c 8 9 P S DOCUMEN ErOCOSS OT NET oom m 10 1 Troubleshooting gt Toner Container Replacement Toner Container Replacement When the touch panel displays Toner is empty replace the toner 1 Remove the old toner container 10 2 Troubleshooting gt Toner Container Replacement 3 NOTE Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations
172. etter 115 B5 gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt STMT 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen 4 5 Copying gt Copying Functions Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 Paper BE Density Selection A40 Normal 0 a es fr Duplex Combine ggg Collate aa e 1 sided 1 sided Off On GB0001 01 2 Select the function Auto 10 10 Standard Zoom Others Zoom Entry S of Standard Zoom Others 10 10 10 10 400 Max Auto 200 141 A5 gt gt A4 100 Zoom Entry gt gt ow TRIINEN gt Cancel Back g d E 7 1 J Eo o Use v or A to scroll up and down Select the zoom level Zoom Entry 10 10 10 10 Auto 1 Standard Zoom i te E S S Cancel Next gt S Cancel lt Bac OK 3 r L3 8p Enter the magnification 4 6 Copying gt Copying Functions Duplex Copy 2 sided documents 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 2 sided to 1 sided fel gt EE 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 2 sided to 2 sided eff Others Duplex 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sid
173. etup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Login Logout If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Login 1 Enter the account ID 10 10 Enter the account ID Counter la m a If this screen is displayed during operations enter the account ID NOTE If you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Check Counter you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned 2 Log in 10 10 Enter the account ID When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to login Refer to Login Logout on page 3 17 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 Logout When the operations are complete press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen Logout 9 54 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Adding an Account This section explains how to add a new account The following entries are required Account Name Enter the account name up to 32 characters Account ID Enter
174. etup 9 18 TEL Connector 2 4 Thick Paper 11 16 ThinPrint Protocol Detail 9 19 ThinPrintOverSSL Protocol Detail 9 19 Toner Container 2 2 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 8 14 Replacement 10 2 Toner Container Lock Lever 2 2 Top Cover 2 2 Touch Panel 2 6 Transparencies 11 14 TWAIN 11 25 Setting TWAIN Driver 2 17 U Unknown Login User Name Job 9 65 USB 11 25 Index 4 USB Cable Connecting 2 10 USB Interface 2 8 USB Interface Connector 2 4 USB Keyboard Type 9 13 USB Memory Printing Documents 7 2 Removing 8 Saving Documents 5 USB Memory Slot 2 2 User Login Administration 9 25 Adding a User 9 29 Editing and Deleting 9 35 Enabling Disabling 9 27 Group Authorization 9 44 Local User Authorization 9 33 My Panel 9 34 Obtain Network User Property 9 48 Simple Login 9 38 User Property 9 7 W Waste Toner Box 2 4 Replacement 10 4 WIA 11 25 setting WIA Driver 2 18 WSD Print Setup 9 20 WSD Scan 6 42 Setup 9 20 X XPS Fit to Page 7 13 Z Zoom Copy 4 5 Send Store 3 50 Index 5 Index 6 QUALITY CERTIFICATE This machine has passed all quality controls and final inspection PASSIONATE PEOPLE FROM ALL OVER THE WORLD KYOCERA MITA EUROPE B V EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 www kyoceramita europe com KYOCERA MITA Europe B V Amsterdam NL Zweigniederlassung Zurich Hohlstrasse 614 CH 8048
175. etwork cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Host name and IP address Port number Failed to send the e mail Check the network and COMMAND CENTER The network cable is connected he hub is not operating properly e POP3 server name of the POP3 user e SMTP server name 2102 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server 2103 Is FTP available e he server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Check the network The network cable is connected he hub is not operating properly he server is not operating properly 2201 Failed to send the e mail Check the network Failed to send via FTP e The network cable is connected Failed to send via SMB he hub is not operating properly 2202 Failed to send the e mail e he server is not operating properly Failed to send via FTP 2203 Failed to send via FTP Failed to send via SMB 2204 Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the 2 22 COMMAND CENTER 2231 Failed to send via FTP Check the network The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly 3101 Failed to send the e mail Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the network The network cable is conne
176. fixing unit and the feed roller unit which have a separate warranty This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights The Customer may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province Neither the seller nor any other person is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE MFP KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC KYOCERA MITA CANADA LTD 225 Sand Road 6120 Kestrel Road Fairfield New Jersey Mississauga Ontario L5T 1S8 07004 0008 USA Canada 1 7 Preface gt Notice Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner Copying Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above 1 8 Preface gt Legal and S
177. for binding on the top v lm 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen 2 u r Paper am Collate Selection i A40 On N GB0097_00 s Functions Cancel 2 Select the function 10 10 D oe 1 sided 2 sided 2 sided GB0065 00 L7 NEN i Su Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Encrypted PDF Password Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box i 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 i Copies 1 ee rum nr EEEENNNNENENN s Job Finish Notice q eee jung Colote el Duplex Selection MIS Override A4 D al 1 sided em CURE NN PDF Password lagi M I 1rrF Print Paper Size Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0097 00 GB0099 00 Cancel Input Q 1 Limit 256 GB0057 21 Up to 256 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Document Box gt Functions for Document Box JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image Print Re
178. g page 8 7 Send Job Log page 8 7 Store Job Log page 8 7 Scanner page 8 12 Printer page 8 73 FAX page 8 73 Toner Status page 8 14 Paper Status page 8 14 Removable Memory page 8 13 xiii lt gt System Menu Counter v Quick Setup Wizard page 3 31 FAX Setup page 3 31 Paper Setup page 3 31 Energy Saver Setup page 3 31 Language page 9 5 Report page 9 5 Report Print page 9 5 Status Page page 9 5 Font List page 9 5 Network Status page 9 5 Service Status page 9 6 Accounting Report page 9 6 Sub Address Box List refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX List Index refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX List No refer to Fax Operation Guide Outgoing FAX Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Incoming FAX Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Admin Report Settings refer to Fax Operation Guide Result Report Setting Send Result Report page 9 6 page 9 6 RX Result Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Job Finish Notice Setting page 9 6 Sending Log History Send Log History page 8 10 page 8 8 pag Auto Sending page 8 10 Destination page 8 9 Job Log Subject page 8 11 Counter Printed Pages page 3 16 Scanned Pages page 3 16 User Property page 9 7 User Name page 9 7 Login User Name page 9
179. gh Windows Firewall Control Panel Home Adon Cuni e System and Security Review your computer s status and resolve issues Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time Network and Internet Hardware and Sound d Windows Firewa Check firewall status Programs User Accounts and Family t System Safety View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Appearance and W Allow remote access See the name of this computer Mi Device Manager Personalization Windows Update ad Clock Language and Region Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates SoS a NOTE If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 r P Windows Firewall Allowed Programs Search Control Panel Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall To add change or remove allowed programs and ports click Change settings What are the risks of allowing a program to communicate Allowed programs and features Name Home Work Private Public O BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP O BranchCache Hosted Cache Client Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Hosted Cache Server Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Peer Discovery Uses WSD CO Connect to a Network Projector Core Networking m HOOOOO HOOOOO N Se O iSCSI Service C
180. ginal Image page 9 11 Background Density Adj page 9 11 EcoPrint page 9 11 FAX TX Resolution refer to Fax Operation Guide Zoom page 9 11 Continuous Scan page 9 12 File Name Entry page 9 12 E mail Subject Body page 9 12 FTP Encrypted TX page 9 12 JPEG TIFF Print page 9 12 XPS Fit to Page page 9 12 Detail Settings page 9 Image Quality page 9 12 12 PDF A page 9 12 Preset Limit page 9 72 Error Handling page 9 13 Duplexing Error page 9 13 Paper Mismatch Error page 9 13 Measurement page 9 13 Keyboard Layout page 9 13 USB Keyboard Type page 9 13 Copy page 9 13 Auto Paper Selection page 9 13 Auto Priority page 9 13 Send page 9 14 Dest Check before Send page 9 14 Entry Check for New Dest page 9 14 Send and Forward page 9 14 Forward page 9 14 Destination page 9 14 Color TIFF Compression page 9 14 Default Screen page 9 14 Document Box Sub Address Box refer to Fax Operation Guide Job Box page 5 5 Quick Copy Job Retention page 5 7 Deletion of Job Retention page 5 10 Polling Box refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide XVI Favorites Application page 9 15 Default Screen page 9 75 Application page 9 15 Internet page 9 15 Proxy page
181. hen selecting On for IPv6 Value IP Address Manual numbers 128 bit in total separated by colons Prefix Length O to 128 Default Gateway HHE HHH HHH HHH NOTE Default Gateway is displayed when selecting Off for RA Stateless RA Stateless Select whether or not to use RA Stateless The RA Stateless setting is available when selecting On for IPv6 When selecting On IP Address 1 to 5 appears under IP Address Stateless Prefix Length Value Off On Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv6 server The DHCP IPv6 setting is available when selecting On for IPv6 Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Item Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Description Protocol Detail The table below lists the network related function settings The network related functions are available when TCP IP is On NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI Value Off On LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol Value Off On SMTP E mail TX Select whether or not to send e mail using SMTP Value Off On POP3 E mail RX Select whether or not to receive e mail using POP3 Value Off On FTP Client Transmission Select whether or not to send documents using FTP When selecting On set the FTP
182. hortcut you wish to delete Using Shortcuts The registered shortcut will be displayed on the Copy Send FAX Print from USB Memory or Save to USB Memory or Polling Box initial screen Pressing Shortcut will switch to the registered function s screen Only on products with the fax function installed Ready to copy 10 10 Copy 0 0 0 0 Copies 1 Paper A Zoom FE Density Selection LL IEEE A40 100 Normal 0 mm um EE E C Duplex Combine gg Collate Lo a Lo 1 sided 1 sided Off On Functions k Favorites GB0001_04 3 30 Common Operations gt Quick Setup Wizard Quick Setup Wizard Make the following basic settings as instructed by the Wizard Paper Setup Sets the paper size and media type for the paper cassettes and the multi purpose tray 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Paper Size Cassette 1 Media Type 2 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Paper Size Cassette 2 Media Type 3 Cassette 3 Cassette 3 Paper Size Cassette 3 Media Type 4 Cassette 4 Cassette 4 Paper Size Cassette 4 Media Type 5 MP Tray MP Tray Paper Size MP Tray Media Type Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode 1 Sleep Mode Sleep Mode Sleep Timer FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings 1 Dialing RX Mode Dialing RX Mode Dialing Mode Dialing RX Mode Reception Mode Dialing RX Mode Auto DRD 2 Local FAX Info Loc
183. il server using the SMTP protocol Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments check the following e The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended e SMTP Settings Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server e If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails 4 Display the screen Start Basic Printer Scanner FAX Jobs Document Box adeanced SMTP Login Menu Protocols TCP IP b AppleTalk MetBELII b E mail Recipient 1 General E mail Recipient 1 E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 SMTP Protocol O on 9 off SMTP Port Number 25 SMTP Server Name 3 SMTP Server Timeout 10 seconds Authentication Protocol P eB e POP before SMT Management E mail Recipient 2 Authenticate as SNMP b E mail Recipient 3 LDAP Authentication F 9 POPS Account 1 POPS Account 2 POPS Account 3 mth ax 2 Configure the function Enter the correct settings in each field Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 ch
184. in paper 60 to 120 g m Recycled paper 60 to 120 g m Optional paper feeder Supported types Plain paper 60 to 120 g m Recycled paper 60 to 120 g m Multi Purpose tray Supported types Plain paper 60 to 220 g m Recycled paper 60 to 220 g m Colored paper 60 to 220 g m Supported paper sizes Letter Legal Statement Oficio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope C5 Other sizes Portrait 4 13 to 8 50 or 105 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm Supported paper sizes Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il A4 A5 B5 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope C5 Other sizes Portrait 5 83 to 8 50 or 148 to 216 mm Landscape 8 27 to 14 02 or 210 to 356 mm Supported paper sizes Letter Statement Executive A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 16K Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm No of sheets 500 80 g m No of sheets 500 80 g m No of sheets 100 80 g m Plain paper 60 to 220 g m Recycled paper 60 to 220 g m Colored paper 60 to 220 g m Legal 50 80 g m Postcards Postcards 100 x 148 mm Oufukuhagaki return postcard Return postcard 148 x 200 mm Envelopes Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Monarch ISO B5 Youkei 2 Youkei 4 11 10 Ap
185. inal SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distributio
186. ing x J cae J v In Windows XP select Share this folder and click the Permissions button 2 F Permissions for scannerdata Share Permissions Group or user names C D me 3 z Select Users or Groups Select this object type Users Groups or Builtin security principals Object Types From this location PCOD1 Locations 2 TT m mples a 3 ost Enter the user name in the text box Click the Location button and select the desired location To select the search target click a location to select it When you are a member of a domain your current domain will be set as the search target by default 6 8 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 4 Permissions for scannerdata EF Share Permissions Group or user names ka Ey fenimmae X PCO01 PCO01 james smith 1 Add Remove Permissions for james smith Allow Deny cat E Change 7 a Read V E Leam about access control and permissions Select the entered user select the Change and Read permissions In Windows XP go to step 6 NOTE Everyone gives sharing permission to everyone on the network To strengthen security it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark 5 Click the OK button in the Advanced Shari
187. ing Size mm il Density File Name PXH Same as Original Size j at entry Color Selection Normal doc Full Color GB0096 00 GB0098 00 C Cancel Add Edi Shortcut Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the storing size Same as Original Size 10 10 Inch Others gt L7 NEN L d GB0132 00 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Metric inch or Others Ready to store in Box 10 10 Same as Metric gt Original Size 1 Others g a i d Select the desired size Ready to store in Box 10 10 Cancel Back GB0132 01 GB0133 00 Use V or to scroll up and down Document Box gt Functions for Document Box 7 16 8 Status Job Cancel This chapter explains the following topics CRE KNO JOD US c HOM 8 2 Details of the Status Screens isswcnccscdacwsucteudneseorsenceusunesnweeudecaendbieunaieuncnnedatvawhsudeuseusdeusshedweensSbwnnedtidactewdeweenes 8 3 Sore dais JOD HIIS ION T enact E E EEE 8 7 Sending the Log HISTON NE TEE 8 8 SGO Me SSM AUION Mr reer E Ea E EE cave EO T 8 9 Automatic Log History Transmission sssssssssssssssssssseseesee nennen nennen nnn nnn nene nnns 8 10 Manual Log History Transmission zsssescesdkt ota sounc Svanevewedendwe sacs Sd Scu RE ea Rute deg uas upra V SOR IURE dU Da FUZUNEUR MI INE EE 8 10 wneazsu bes eqt c r
188. ins from Local User or Network User Local User Network User GB0739 00 GB0740 00 Password Login 10 10 User Password Login Icon o e pu M x o e e Cancel OK e E UN a oO oO 9 42 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Icon 10 10 User System Menu Counter 10 10 nom 1 Male 2 2 r Jiii 1 User A are 2 Ly D Password Login Off 1 T pe TIT P2 b Icon Male 1 E ii a oM Cancel Cancel 1 2 lt J GB0739 00 GB0828 01 Use v or AN to scroll up and down 3 Register the user 10 10 2 d Password Login Off GB0739 00 Cancel Save d To delete A 989 gjo l jo af O 03 User D 04User E 05 None C9 1 1 J E 06 None 07 None 08 None t GB0712 01 Select the user you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE You can also delete a user by selecting the name pressing Menu and then pressing Delete 9 43 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Group Authorization Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server NOTE To use the group authorization settings Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method and NTLM or Kerberos must be selected as the server type in Enabling Disabling User Login Ad
189. int Jobs K GB0052_02 Status Job Cancel 10 10 Removable Memory Attached Pas USB Keyboard 2 Invalid 4 4 EEE Pause All Print Jobs Select the device you wish to check GB0052 03 2 Check the status Scanner 10 10 GB0189 00 The status of an original scanning in the document processor or the error information paper jam opened cover etc is displayed 8 12 Status Job Cancel gt Check of Device Status Printer Status Job Cancel GB0190 00 Error information such as paper jam out of toner or out of paper and status such as waiting or printing are displayed FAX 1 1 e 10 10 Vv el e The information such as sending receiving and dialing is displayed GB0191 00 Press Line Off to cancel a fax in sending receiving For details refer to the FAX Operation Guide NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Removable Memory 10 10 Status Loaded Capacity 1 9GB 1 1 Used Area 684 1MB Free Space 1 2GB Menu Remove End Memory l e The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed GB0194_00 e Press Menu and then Format to format external media Press Remove Memory to safely remove the external media This operation is the same as that for Removing USB Memory on page 7 8 8 13 Status Job Cancel gt Checking the Remaini
190. interface located on the right side of the body 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC Connecting the Power Cable s MN EN eee Wa Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet Q IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine 2 10 Preparation before Use gt Power On Off Power On Off Power On Power Off When the main o indicator is lit Recovery from sleep Power indicator Press the Power key When the main power indicator is off Turn the main power switch on Q IMPORTANT When turning off the main power switch do not turn on the main power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the main power switch When not turning off the main x A uen sleep ain Power indicator Press the Power key The Power key light will go out and the Main Power indicator will light up Preparation before Use gt Power On Off When turning off the main power switch Note that when the main power switch is turned off the machine will be unable to automatically receive print data from computers or faxes 1 Press the Power key Check that the indicators are off Verify that the Power key light has gone out and that the Main Power indicator is lit up Turn the main power switch off NOTE When the Processing indicator or Memory indicator is lit u
191. ion System Menu Counter 2 DeviceAdmin 4000 caw ks 1 1 m Check the settings and change or add information as needed User Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User 4 Login Password Ea A A A Account Name Others m GB0446 00 9 30 User Al Input Limit 32 zxa i eh EEE EET Tel L GB0440 00 GB0057 26 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Login User Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Input Limit 64 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password 5555550080088 Account Name Others d Login Password GB0446 00 GB0057 28 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Inputs Limit64 User Name Login User Name User a 1 2 Login Password xokokoelolekolokok Account Name Others e Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes GB0446 00 GB0057 29 Accounting Name Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 ped Q J User Name User A 2 f Others Login User Name User A Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Login Password nnns Account Name Others Cancel GB0446 00 GB0603 00 Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results Displays details for individual account names E mail Ad
192. ion method Select the address type 10 10 Group gt 1 1 GB0419 01 e 6 24 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Enter the destination name Sales department 1 Input18 WORT 1 Limit 32 GB0057 11 Cancel Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 5 Enter the address number Select the item that you want to change 10 10 10 10 Name Sales department 1 1 Address Number Auto 1 2 E mail Address n Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 000 250 GB0078 02 GB0217 01 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 6 Enter the destination 10 10 10 10 E mail Address GB0078 03 e GB0078 02 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the type of destination to register For details on FAX refer to FAX Operation Guide N E mail Address Limit 128 Input 11 B 1 e N LO e eo en o Enter the E mail address Up to 128 characters can be entered 6 25 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters
193. ions can be registered as favorites so that they can be called up easily The following functions are pre registered on this machine You can delete these functions as well as register new functions e ID Card Copy e Paper Saving Copy e Scan to PC Address Entry e Scan to PC Address Book e Scan to E mail Address Entry e Scan to E mail Address Book Registering Favorites When registering a favorite you can choose from two methods for calling it up e Wizard mode Registered settings are called up in order and configured as you check or change each one e Program mode Settings are called up immediately when you press the key to which they are registered NOTE Up to 20 settings can be registered as favorites 4 Configure the function Ready to copy 10 10 Copies ok d Paper Zoom Density Selection J A40 100 Normal 0 y um a I C Duplex Combine gj Collate kam L 1 sided 1 sided Off On GB0001 01 When registering favorites in program mode configure the copy function send function fax function destination or other setting to register Only on products with the fax function installed 2 Display the screen ss Entry m lt as EJ EJ EJ Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A Scan to E mail A 10 10 Favorites Application m EZ p gt as ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre ss Book ddress Entry ddress Book
194. ips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam How to Load Originals Q IMPORTANT Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original table size 3 13 Common Operations gt Loading Originals 2 Load Originals Put the side to be scanned or the first side of two sided originals face up Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go NOTE Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam see the figure Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals If there is a gap readjust the original width guides The gap may cause the originals to jam Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last not first 3 14 Common Operations gt Checking the Equipment s Serial Number Checking the Equipment s Serial Number The equipment s serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure XXXXXXXXX MFP MFP AC120V 60Hz 9 5A AC220 240V 50 60Hz 5 1A MACHINE No XXXXXXXXXX MANUFACTURED MANUFACTURED NOTE You ll need the equipment s serial number when contacting your Service Representative P
195. iption User Name Changes the name shown on the user list Up to 32 characters can be entered Login User Name Displays the login user name that is entered at login Login Password Changes the password that is entered at login Up to 64 characters can be entered Access Level Displays the user s access level Account Name Displays the account to which the user belongs E mail Address Changes the user s e mail address Up to 128 characters can be entered Simple Login When simple login is enabled changes associated settings My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Network users are not displayed Group Name When group authorization is enabled displays the name shown in the group list Group ID When group authorization is enabled displays the ID shown in the group list Cassette MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose tray Cassette 1 Description Paper Size Set the paper size to load in Cassette 1 Value Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio II Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope C5 or Custom NOTE Paper Size is only displayed when the Cassette 1 size dial is set to Other For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9 10 Media Type
196. is connected to a public network location Leam more about profiles 2 Make sure all checkboxes are selected 6 13 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC New Inbound Rule Wizard Name Specify the name and description of this rule Steps Enter Scan to SMB in Name and click Finish In Windows XP or Windows Vista 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security or Security Center and then Check Firewall Status or Windows Firewall If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port button 3 Specify Add a Port settings Enter any name in Name example Scan to SMB This will be the name of the new port Enter 139 in Port Number Select TCP for Protocol 4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box 6 14 sending gt Specifying Destination Specifying Destination Select the destination to which to send an image Select the destination using either of the following methods e Choosing from the Address Book page 6 15 e Choosing by One Touch Key page 6 17 e Entering a New E mail Address page 6 18 e Specifying a New PC Folder page 6 19 NOTE If you are using the products equipped with the fax function you can specify the fax destination Enter the other party s number using the numeric keypad Choosing from the Add
197. k or thin Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 110 mm Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast 11 12 Appendix gt Paper Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6 To maintain the right level of moisture content bear in mind the following considerations e Store paper in a cool well ventilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while e Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the proper moisture level for
198. l Select the document you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon GB0654_00 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents such as Private Printing or Proof and Hold Printing saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time Off Temporary documents are not automatically deleted However the temporary documents will be deleted when the power is turned off 1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour 4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours 1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day 1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set Regardless of this function setting temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off 1 Display the screen 10 10 s e FAX System Menu Counter 10 10 i Favorites au 1 1 a Box System Menu Counter Quick Copy Job Retention i 1 Sub Address Box GB0054 02 Lm 32ioh sY GB0290 00 Deletion of Job Retention Off GB0310 00 2 Select the time 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0312_00 6 sending This chapter explains the following topics sexui cm ste tussetetaar 6
199. lease check the number before contacting your Service Representative 3 15 Common Operations gt Checking the Counter Checking the Counter Check the number of pages printed and scanned 1 Display the screen 10 10 c E Quick Setup Wizard lt gt System Menu Counter Een 1 5 gt 2 Report 9 i Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0054 00 2 Check the counter 10 10 Printed Pages Scanned Pages GB0584 00 Select the job you wish to check Printed Pages Use v or to scroll up and down Printer Total 222 10 10 GB0585 00 Scroll the screen to check the number of pages Pressing Count by Paper Size and then Black amp White allows you to check the number of pages by paper size Scanned Pages GB0589 00 Common Operations gt Login Logout Login Logout If user login administration is enabled it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine Refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 for the default login user name and password N NOTE You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password In this event login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login Normal login 1 Enter the login user name 10 10 Input 4 Limit64 Login User Name E rd Login Password Keyboa rd If this screen is displayed during o
200. leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury Q IMPORTANT Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass When placing books or magazines on the machine do so with the document processor or original cover in the open position 3 12 Common Operations gt Loading Originals Loading Originals in the Document Processor The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Originals Supported by the Document Processor Weight 50 to 120 g m duplex 50 to 110 g m Size Maximum A4 to Minimum A5 Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement Capacity Plain paper 80 g m Colored paper Recycled paper High quality paper 50 sheets Plain paper 110 g m 36 sheets Thick paper 120 g m 33 sheets Art paper 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor e Soft originals such as vinyl sheets Transparencies such as OHP film Carbon paper Originals with very slippery surfaces Originals with adhesive tape or glue e Wet originals Originals with correction fluid which is not dried e irregularly shaped non rectangular originals Originals with cut out sections e Crumpled paper Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the cl
201. less The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMP v6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification Send as E mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time 11 24 Appendix gt Glossary SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers Status Page The page lists machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24
202. lize Sales department 1 0123456 e T Support department 0234567 om 1 1 GB0114 04 EX lj Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries Edit and delete the destinations contacts you added to the Address Book 1 Display the screen 10 10 e Dest j S d 2 Recall Check e e gt One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book 3 ee J 6 Ww Surg E Ready to send 001 123456 001 G 123456 J001 5 123456 A 3 NM ae G 2 Edit or delete the destination To edit the destination Address Book All 019 Hi Sales department 1 002 Support department 001 SYSTEM DEP 003 y Sales department 1 Menu GB0396 01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the destination contacts or group to edit Address Book All a lll 001 iz 123456 123456 em 123 456789 co G 10 10 1 1 12345 com ua 11111 com m GB0426 01 10 10 Member 2 Cancel Next GB0785 00 You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key Ready to send 10 10 Sales department 1 Address Number E mail Address Cancel GB0786 00 Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question 6 31 Use V or A to scroll up and down Sending gt Registering Destinations i
203. ly be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 9 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy sh
204. m Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto IP Auto IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup However DHCP requires a DHCP server Auto IP is a server less method of choosing an IP address IP addresses between 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 are reserved for Auto IP and assigned automatically Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep A mode designed for electrical power saving activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period In Sleep mode power consumption is kept to a minimum Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjo
205. ministration on page 9 27 Select On for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9 19 Group Authorization Settings Use the group authorization 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Network Authentication Local User List Simple login settings Group Authorization Off Group List 2 Group Authorization Set Y GB0435 03 GB0450 00 Use v or A to scroll up and down 2 Select On 10 10 Off 1 1 NP La GB0451_00 Add a Group Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Up to 20 groups can be individually registered Other users and groups belong to Others Group ID Enter the ID displayed on the group list between 1 and 4294967295 Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list up to 32 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Send Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memor
206. mission to all destinations at one time NOTE If the destinations include a fax the images sent to all destinations will be black and white 6 23 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Registering Destinations in the Address Book Add a new destination to the Address Book There are two registering methods contacts and groups When adding a group enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book Adding a Contact A maximum of 200 contact addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FAX No Only on products with the fax function installed NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Contact addresses can also be registered in the system menu 4 Display the screen 10 10 Dest 0 Check S n 2 Recall G mi One Touch Key Ext Address Book N 1 2 E mail a Ready to send 1 GB0055 00 10 10 Address Book All Iva 001 pa 123456 123456 001 E 123456 123 456789 co uw 1 1 j001 g 123456 12345 com Ga 001 pe 123456 11111 com GB0426 01 am d T7 E T 2 Adds a new destination zl Hc ee 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0396 01 3 Select the registrat
207. n 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 f you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh gcryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 1 10 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simp
208. n 10 10 2 6 jj Scan Resolution 300x300dpi vensit d Normal 0 Shortcu Use v or AN to scroll up and down GB0081 01 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Image copy sena ea USB Select original image type for best results Text Photo Best for originals which contain a mixture of text and photos Best for photographs Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines Graphic Map Best for graphics and maps Printer Output Best for documents printed on this machine originally Text for OCR For documents to be read by OCR This function is displayed while copying This function is displayed when the color mode is Auto Color B amp W or Black amp White when sending or storing 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Image Ready to copy E 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies Exi gt Original Si H Ge riginal Size Paper LOW Zoom all Density electi MINE SECTION SEN ea gu Original Orientation Ps 100 Normal 0 Top Edae on Left it v rum p LL c d Image LL c d Duplex Combine agp Colts 4 abo 1 sided 3 1 sided Off On Add Edit ias c Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0001 01 GB0002 00 a Select the
209. n name e Path Folder share permissions of the recipient 6 20 1103 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name e Path Folder share permissions of the recipient 6 20 Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings e Path Folder share permissions of the recipient 6 20 1104 Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail address NOTE If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send the e mail 6 18 1105 Failed to send via SMB Select On of the SMB settings on the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send the e mail Select On of the SMTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send via FTP Select On of the FTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER 2 22 1106 Failed to send the e mail Check the sender address of SMTP on the COMMAND CENTER 2 22 1131 Failed to send via FTP Select On of the secure protocol settings on the COMMAND CENTER 2 22 1132 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server e Is FIPS available s the encryption available 10 19 2 22 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 2101 Failed to send via SMB Check the network and SMB settings 2 22 Failed to send via FTP Check the network and FTP settings The n
210. n SITIO S eese ene Ead nM MELDEN MUN e 9 3 ROPOT RR RR ERR M eee 9 5 BM iso RC N 9 7 Cassette MP Tray Settings cccccccccccssccecseeecceeeeceeeeceeusccceaeeecsaseccsagecceseeeeseueeesseeesseusesssueeeessaeeessagees 9 7 COMTOR CNS QR MPH He 9 9 oo A 9 13 p ME 9 14 miei avere eiie DIR 9 15 jpg T n 9 15 minae 9 16 rg MP 9 17 B uH e 9 22 Adjustment Maintenance uenia gint Gom c it Gase tacens Esa RU Ria Mm En SUM RCM dest UR music N M Gana TS 9 23 Bc queenEitenngiigie MR E T U m 9 25 First User Login Administration ssseessssssssesseseeeeen enne emen nnn n nennen nnns nnns 9 25 Usor Kee nEel ige MNT EU a E A E 9 26 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration ccccccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesseeeeesaeeeeaeeeeeas 9 27 HOGA User AUthONZAUONM WR T E 9 33 ao qeE 29I RN 9 29 Editing and Deleting
211. n User Login refer to User Login Administration on page 9 25 and for details on Job Accounting refer to Job Accounting on page 9 50 Reference Page Printer Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine System Configures machine system settings Network Configures network settings Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB host or optional interfaces Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Restart Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box Optional Memory When optional memory is installed select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Date Timer Configures settings related to the date and time Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing qualit
212. n messages AAT Displays available functions and Ua Scrolls up and down when the list of GB0002 00 i fa Original I o settings values cannot be displayed in its ibi dab S NN Return to the previous screen Registers functions as shortcuts anc 2 6 Preparation before Use gt Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables for your environment Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable 1000BASE T 100BASE TX or 10BASE T C D E Printing Network FAX COMMAND CENTER Network settings Scanner default settings User and destination registration Administrator s PC Network na ce r al fr ie T T ml Me am Gm E py ls ge Network Network Network Network Network USB Send E mail Sends the image data of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E mail message gt 6 18 Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC gt 6 19 Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP gt 6 19 TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between sof
213. n on Copying Scanning seessesssessseseeeeneeen enne 1 8 Legal and Safety Information else nennen nnne nennen nnne nnne nnne nn nis 1 9 Legal I noie 1 9 Energy Saving Control Function sees nnns 1 12 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function ccccecccceccceecceeeeseeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeeeeeaeeeees 1 12 melle eee 1 12 Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program ccccccccceececeeeeeeeceeaeeeseeeeseueeeeeeesaeeetaes 1 12 About this Operat n GUIDE m 1 13 Conventions in This Guide 200 ccc ee cc eccc cece cece eeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeseueseeeseeeseeesaeesaeesaeeeaes 1 13 Originals and Paper Sizes i oes onmino nag ants ent a deese nua one Hes Raga S dowecdaiceniseedeeeds duo n qu KM MS 1 15 2 Preparation before Use eeeeeeeeeee eene 2 1 mH 2 2 MiretelellB ic A 2 2 Sereni MEN mm 2 5 TOUR IP AMON BL 2 6 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables eeeeeeeeeesses 2 7 OTIS CONN ANA ERRORI m 2 7 Preparing Necessary Cables cccccccsscccsecceeeceeeceeeceusecaeeceuesegeesaeesseesaeeseneeseeesaeees 2 8 Sende 2 9 Connecting LAN Cable M 2 9 Connecting USB CADIE sarreren enki itani eanna SEEE E ARARE EE uan MuR uua 2 10 Connec
214. n on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol Q Alert of required action Z Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function 1 2 Preface gt Notice Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows e Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C Humidity 15 to 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality It is recommended to use the machine at a temperature around 60 8 to 80 6 F or less 16 to 27 C humidity around 36 to 65 In addition Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight Avoid locations with vibrations Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During cop
215. n page 9 19 LAN Interface Item Description LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used Value Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1000BASE T A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces Description USB Host This locks and protects the USB memory slot Value Unblock Block USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector Value Unblock Block Optional Interface This locks and protects the optional interface slot Value Unblock Block Only on products with the fax function installed 9 21 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu RAM Disk Setting Description RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box Value RAM Disk Setting Off On RAM Disk Size Setting range varies with Optional Memory settings A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Optional Memory Description Optional Memory When optional memory is installed select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Value Printer Priority Normal Copy Priority
216. n the Address Book Ready to send 10 10 Name Sales department 1 Address Number Auto E mail Address GB0786 00 e To delete a member group To delete a member from a group select the destination you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon 10 10 Ready to send E Name Support department 2 m Sales department 1 0123456 a Address Number Auto 1 Support department 0234567 Member Member 2 i GB0787 00 a 4 1 EL Ready to send 10 10 pol send gt Support department 0234567 a Cancel mmi 2 I i Menu End dE O To delete See 10 10 Ready to send Address Book All Iva 019 A Sales department 1 B Support department B SYSTEM DEP Cancel GB0396 01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down n 3 mm 3 Select the destination contacts or group to delete 6 32 fh Sales department 1 Member 2 am 1 1 Name Support department Address Number Auto Member Member 1 Delete t GB0114 04 10 10 10 10 1 01 GB0788 00 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Add a new destination contact or group on One Touch Key Adding a Destination Add a new destination contact or group A maximum of 100 destinations can be registered To register a destination to a One Touch Key it mus
217. n the current zoom and the size of the original Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed Value Off On If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Send Configures settings for sending functions Item Dest Check before Send Description When performing sending jobs display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key Value Off On Entry Check for New Dest When adding new destination display the entry check screen to check the entered destination Value Off On Send and Forward Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images Forward Set the rule to send the original Multiple rules can be selected Value Forward Off On Rule FAX E mail Folder SMB Folder FTP NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Destination Set the destination to use when storing originals Select the destination using either of the following methods Address Book Ext Address Book Address Entry E mail Address Entry Folder Color TIFF Compression
218. n using such paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight overall paper weight 104 to 151 g m Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 160 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 composite 11 15 Appendix gt Paper Hagaki Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality otoring envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them Keep the following points in mind Donotu
219. nal a printed photograph Set the image quality to Photo 3 47 dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly Printouts are not clear Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality 3 47 quality for the original 10 11 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Printouts have black lines Is the slit glass dirty Clean the slit glass 10 7 ABC 123 Images are skewed Are the originals placed correctly When placing originals on the platen 3 12 align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the 3 13 document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper loaded correctly Check the position of the paper width 3 2 guides When displaying an image Have you selected 200 x 100dpi Select a scan resolution other than 3 46 sent from the machine on the Normal or 200 x 400dpi Super for the 200 x 100dpi Normal or 200 x 400dpi PC an image size is shrunk scan resolution Super when sending an image vertically or horizontally Cannot send via SMB Is the network cable connected Connect the correct network cable 2 9 securely Have the network settings for the Configure the TCP IP settings 9 17 equipment been configured properly properly Have the folder sharing settings been Check sharing settings and access 6 7 co
220. nd connected to the PC before installing the printer driver from the DVD Installing Printer Driver in Windows If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC follow the next steps to install the printer driver The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC NOTE If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel If the autorun screen is displayed click Run Setup exe If the user account management window appears click Allow You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software Express Mode automatically detects connected machines and installs the required software Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed For details refer to Custom Installation in the Printer Driver Operation Guide on the DVD 4 Insert the DVD 2 Display the screen r Y r nl C Kyocera Product Library lol C Kyocera Product Library Se KYOCERA THE NEW VALUE FRONTIER KYOCERA THE NEW VALUE FRONTIER Notice Install Software By using or installing the device drivers DOE and Software in aavancegyools Hardware Documentation Software Documentation Software Release Notes Select Language c 2011 KVOUERA MEA mee a EE ao Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement 2 13 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software 3 Install using Express Mode 1
221. nd waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations otore the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it 1 3 Preface gt Notice Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC EN 60825 1 2007 Caution Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTE
222. nfigured properly privileges under the folder properties Has the SMB protocol been set to Set the SMB protocol setting to On 2 21 On Has the Host Name been entered Check the name of the computer to 6 5 properly which data is being sent Has the Path been entered properly Check the share name for the shared 6 10 folder Has the Login User Name been Check the domain name and login 6 19 entered properly user name Has the same domain name been Delete the domain name and 6 19 used for the Host Name and Login backslash from the Login User User Name Name Has the Login Password been Check the login password 6 19 entered properly Have exceptions for Windows Firewall Configure exceptions for Windows 6 11 6 14 been configured properly Firewall properly Do the time settings for the equipment Set the equipment domain server and domain server and data destination data destination computer to the same computer differ time Is the touch panel displaying Send Refer to Responding to Send Error 10 19 error Domain name user name for example abcdnet james smith User name 2domain name for example james smith abcdnet 10 12 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name for example pc001 abcdnet com You can also enter login user names in the following formats Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Responding to
223. ng Amount of Toner and Paper Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Check the remaining amount of toner and paper on the touch panel 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status 5 Job Cancel Eme og J Drax 2 Waiting 1 Pre Status No Paper g Use V or A to scroll up and down GB0052 02 Print Jobs Select the consumable you wish to check 2 Check the status Toner Status 10 10 Black C 10096 Waste Toner OK fd o i C T 1 End el GB0192_00 You can check the remaining amount of toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0 and check the status of waste toner box Paper Status 10 10 ILS W Piain lE 100 21 P Piain 100 1 2 E P Plain 100 AS B MER 100 V End GB0193 00 n Use V or to scroll up and down You can check the size orientation type and remaining amount of paper in each paper source The remaining amount of paper is shown by four levels as 100 70 30 and 0 none however the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by two levels as 100 and 0 If there is no paper in either cassette the paper status will be shown as No Paper 8 14 9 setup Registration and User Management This chapter explains the following topics VSS UNDE e Dn 9 2 er uesmu tHe e T EN 9 2 System Me
224. ng Paper Jams 10 28 11 Appendix This chapter explains the following topics OO TO Mal TEQUIOII OTN serene ei 11 2 Overview of Optional Equipment ccccccsecccescceeeceeeceueceueeceecuceceuecsuecsueeceueseuecsueessuesseessueseaeeseeegas 11 2 FADER FORO DE 11 2 Expansion Memory AREE T E 11 3 e elis TUG LOIN NU ceca 11 4 BoD REVDO c o 11 4 SejirenrihabisenoMe E M 11 5 Character una c deeds 11 7 mtm m E 11 10 Basic Paper SpecHicallOLS x xemscetatietestursiti mp cesprterus a a ERE aE eese spud Fees Ube Ea eva tek tuU E iG 11 11 Choosing the Appropriate Paper eset dpuse Imo Du Ioas aas Das equgusont 99s nec c Gea ases dun aod Ue i aa an D icu ML tees 11 11 SS CAM Me 0 c BR RR ED 11 14 SPEME LONS qe m 11 18 Meg 11 18 gus 11 20 we M 11 20 Beer i o Nm o mmt 11 21 Environmental Specificati ns RE 11 21 Coria 11 22 Appendi
225. ng it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag Statement and A6 can only be used in cassette 1 1 Adjust the cassette size 1 Q IMPORTANT When pulling the cassette out of the machine ensure it is supported and does not fall out 3 3 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Adjust the cassette size to reflect the size of paper being loaded Paper sizes are marked on the cassette NOTE If you are going to set paper that is longer than A4 pull out the extension cassettes pushing the lock lever one by one and adjust them to the desired paper size Q IMPORTANT To use a paper size that does not appear on the size dial set the size dial to Other The paper size must also be set from the operation panel For details see Quick Setup Wizard on page 3 31 3 4 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 3 Load paper 3 5 Common Operations gt Loading Paper
226. ng screen to close the screen 6 cB scannerdata Properties General nf Securty A vus Versions Customize Object name C scannerdata Group or user names amp amp SYSTEM E PC0381 PCOO1 james smith I Administrators PCOO1 Administrators 2 To change permissions click Edit In Windows XP click the Security tab and then click the Add button 7 Proceed in the same way as in step 3 to add a user to Group or user names 8 ccu 9 Permissions for scannerdata Security Object name C scannerdata Group or user names Add Remove Permissions for james smith Allow Deny Caull annteal E Modify 7 E Read amp execute 2 3 OS E Read m E Leam about access control and permissions 3 Gm Select the added user select the Modify and Read amp execute permissions sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Checking the Path Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document 1 Display the window 1 Enter pc001 in Program and File Search in the Start menu 2 pc001 scannerdata In Windows XP click Search in the Start menu select All files and folders and search for the destination computer to which the file will be sent In Search Companion click Computers or people and then A computer on the network
227. nge the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 for the default login user name and password Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard el Q e co N N eo a o 2 Configure the function 10 10 Job Accounting O Print Accounting Report ff 1 2 Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting V GB0461 00 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting gt page 9 53 EN Login Logout gt page 9 54 Adding an Account gt page 9 55 Editing and Deleting Accounts page 9 57 Restricting the Use of the Machine P page 9 59 Counting the Number of Pages Printed gt page 9 61 Printing an Accounting Report gt page 9 63 Job Accounting Default Setting gt page 9 64 Unknown Login User Name Job page 9 65 9 52 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 52 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting Off Print ACCOUNTING report Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_00 2 Enable job accounting 10 10 booo 1 1 E d GB0462_00 NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID S
228. nn nns 9 65 9 1 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Configure settings related to overall machine operation Operation Method The system menu is operated as follows 4 Display the screen lt gt System Menu Counter 2 Configure the function 10 10 Ep system YN Date Timer Displays available functions 5 5 f Adjustment Maintenance GB0054 04 System Menu Counter 10 10 Date Time 10 10 2010 10 10 Date Format DD MM YYYY 1 3 Time Zone 09 D0 Osaka Sapporo Tokyo Vv Displays available GB0610 00 functions tot Selecting a value it to be 12 00 International Date Line West accepted 11 00 Samoa 1 24 11 00 Universal Coordinated Time 11 o o lt Kol o a o Returns to the original I 10 00 H ii screen without making E bd Scrolls up and down when the list of values cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single Return to the previous Accepts the settings NOTE In order to change settings that require administer privileges you must log in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 for the default login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard GB0723 00 t Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed 9 2 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu S
229. nner tray and press Continue When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Job Accounting restriction Is the acceptable printing count The printing count exceeded the exceeded restricted by Job Accounting acceptable count restricted by Job exceeded Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press End When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses K Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page KPDL error PostScript error has occurred The job is canceled Press End When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses L Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Left cover is open Is the left cover open Close the left cover 10 15 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Message Machine failure Checkpoints Corrective Actions Internal error has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel and contact your Service Representative Reference Page Maximum number of scanned pages Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned
230. ns how to scan an original using TWAIN The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example The WIA driver is used in the same way 4 Display the window 1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application 2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box NOTE For selecting the machine see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software 2 Configure the function Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens Original Configurations Original Size Image Quality Settings Color Settings A4 Black and White Original Orientation amp FR Send Configurations Duplex Setting Resolution 200d Image Quality l Text Image Adjustment Density off The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows Original Configurations Original Size Detail Select the scan size of the original Original Orientation Specify the type of binding Send Configurations Duplex Setting Specify whether the original is one sided or two sided Image Quality Settings Color Settings Select the color mode Resolution Select the resolution Image Quality Select the image quality according to the type of original Image Adjustment Density 6 45 Select the exposure Select the Auto button to have the exposure set
231. ns x Sen Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Icons that you are using for this folder to all folders of this type Advanced settings Launch folder windows in a separate process Restore previous folder windows at logon V Show drive letters V Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color V Show pop up description for folder and desktop items V Show preview handlers in preview pane 2 Use Sharing Wizard Recommended Automatically type into the Search Box Select the typed item in the view Restore Defauts _ 3 Eze Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard Recommended in Advanced settings In Windows XP click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing Recommended in Advanced settings 4 Create a folder 1 Create a folder on the local disk C For example create a folder with the name scannerdata on the local disk C 2 Right click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing Click the Advanced Sharing button In Windows XP right click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security or Sharing sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 2 Configures permission settings r Advanced Sharing V Share this folder 1 Settings Share name scannerdata Limit the number of simultaneous users to 20 Comments 2 Permissions cach
232. nter E Command Prompt uu FEL Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76001 Copyright lt c gt 26069 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users james smith gt net config workstation Computer name NNPCBUT Full Computer name TETS WEIT Workstation active on NetBT_Tcpip_ XXXXXXXH RRRR RRXK XRRR RARRRRRRRRRR eititititititititititats Pe Software version Jindows 7 Ultimate Workstation domain Logon domain COM Open Timeout Csec gt COM Send Count Chyte gt COM Send Timeout Cmsec gt The command completed successfully C Users james smith gt Screen example user name james smith and domain name ABCDNET sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Creating a Shared Folder Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer NOTE If there is a workgroup in System Properties configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Appearance and Personalization and then Folder Options Ease OT ACCESS Center E Accommodate low vision Use screen reader Turn on easy access keys Turn High Contrast on or off mck to open Show hidden files and folders Fonts N Preview delete or show and hidefonts ChangeFontSettings Adjust ClearType text E NVIDIA Control Panel Windows XP click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools f Folder Optio
233. o change to a media type other than Plain refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Description Set the paper size for multi purpose tray Value Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio II Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or Custom NOTE For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9 10 Media Type Set the media type for multi purpose tray Value Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 10 Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Common Settings Configures overall machine operation Default Screen Item Description Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen Value Copy Send FAX Document Box Favorites Application Status Default Screen Sound Description Buzzer Set options for buzzer s
234. o connect to the network The IPv4 setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP DHCP Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv4 server Value Off On Bonjour Select whether or not to use Bonjour Value Off On Auto IP Select whether or not to use Auto IP Value Off On IP Address Set the IP addresses When the DHCP setting is On the current IP address is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an IP address set the DHCP setting to Off Value HHH HHH THER HHH Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet masks When the DHCP setting is On the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an Subnet Mask set the DHCP setting to Off Value HHE HHH THER HHH Default Gateway Set the IP gateway addresses When the DHCP setting is On the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an Default Gateway set the DHCP setting to Off Value THHE THER THER HHH A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu IPv6 Settings Description Set up TCP IP IPv6 to connect to the network The IPv6 setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 Sets whether to use IPv6 Value Off On Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address prefix length and gateway address of TCP IP IPv6 The Manual Setting is available w
235. ocedure Follow the on screen instructions to restart the system if required You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode if the machine and computer are connected via a network The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver continue by configuring the TWAIN driver 2 17 or WIA driver 2 78 2 14 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh The machine s printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer NOTE When printing from a Macintosh computer set the machine s emulation to KPDL or KPDL Auto For details about the configuration method refer to Printer on page 9 16 If connecting by Bonjour enable Bonjour in the machine s network settings For details refer to Network on page 9 17 In the Authenticate screen enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system AppleTalk icon is not displayed on Mac OS X 10 6 4 Insert the DVD Double click the DVD icon 2 Display the screen eoo 4 OS X 10 5 or higher C aj M im z Q DEVICES DEVICES SHARED PLACES PLACES Double click Double click x 6 items Zero KB available o Double click either OS X 10 2 and 10 3 Only OS X 10 4 Only or OS X 10 5 or higher depending on your Mac OS version A x 2 items Zero KB available C 4
236. ode setting Auto Color Gray Scan to USB Automatically detects whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale Auto Color B amp W Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White Full Color Scan document in full color Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish Black amp White Scan document in black and white File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Color Selection 10 10 10 10 Dest 0 Ga i Check Color Selection a Full Color N gg Original Image One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book eH h 1 2 as arpness T b m Background Density Adj E mail Folder FAX Vv SA Text Photo GB0081 02 Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0055 00 Select the color mode 10 10 Ready to send s Li Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Grayscale Black amp White GB0022 01 3 53 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Job Finish Notice send e mail notice when a job is complete Scan to P
237. odel 220 to 240V 50 60 Hz more than 5 1 A Power Consumption Maximum Standard 1032 W U S A Canada 1046 W European countries With options 1037 W U S A Canada 1063 W European countries Power FS 3540MFP Standard 679 9 W U S A Canada 676 6 W European countries Consumption With options 713 3 W U S A Canada 688 2 W European countries During printing FS 3640MFP Standard 680 9 W U S A Canada 677 4 W European countries With options 719 0 W U S A Canada 703 5 W European countries Power FS 3540MFP Standard 679 9 W U S A Canada 676 6 W European countries Consumption With options 713 3 W U S A Canada 688 2 W European countries During printing FS 3640MFP Standard 680 9 W U S A Canada 677 4 W European countries With options 719 0 W U S A Canada 703 5 W European countries Power FS 3540MFP Standard 94 5 W U S A Canada 95 8 W European countries Consumption With options 101 6 W U S A Canada 103 7 W European countries During standby FS 3640MFP Standard 104 6 W U S A Canada 97 9 W European countries With options 113 0 W U S A Canada 102 1 W European countries Power FS 3540MFP Standard 6 8 W U S A Canada 6 9 W European countries Consumption With options 8 8 W U S A Canada 9 1 W European countries Sleep mode FS 3640MFP Standard 10 4 W U S A Canada 10 6 W European countries With options 12 5 W U S A Canada 12 6 W E
238. of stored jobs 10 10 o o e se 2 m o t You can enter any number between 0 and 50 NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use the Proof and Hold function 5 7 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Printing and Deleting the Document You can print and delete documents stored in the Proof and Hold box 1 Display the screen Document Box 1 Sub Address Box GB0051_00 2 Select the creator of the document 10 10 E 1 1 Cancel Back 2 G E 3 Select the document 1010 VI doc 100831170850 _ doc 100831170814 at t El __ amp doc 100831170659 _ Sjdoc 100831170519 GB0654 00 Cancel 4 Print and delete the document To print the document 10 10 Vi idoc 100831170850 e _ Sjdoc 100831170814 1 1 amp doc 100831170659 __ Sjdoc 100831170519 GB0654_00 Specify the number of copies to print as desired When using the number of copies specified with print job select Em Document Box Removable Removable Memory J 10 10 Private Print Proof and Hold e GB0650 00 Displays details for individual documents amd 00 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer To delete Document Box Vi FB doc 100831170850 __ Sjdoc 100831170814 uw B amp doc 100831170659 om __ S doc 100831170519 om e
239. okelekelolok Account Name Others l d GB0441_00 GB0057 28 9 35 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Login Password 10 10 2 User Name User A Login User Name User M Input 3 Limit 64 Login Password xokolekokekekelolok P Account Name Others Cancel Save n 3 Cancel Next gt afle i o Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes GB0441 00 Account Name Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 i Q User Name User A 2 Login User Name User A Login Password xokolekokekekelolok 1 Account Name Others Cancel Cancel GB0441_00 GB0603_00 Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results Displays details for individual account names E mail Address 10 10 2 Input 11 i i Limit128 E mail Address N p e GB0441 01 GB0057 30 My Panel 10 10 E mail Address Access Level Wette Language English Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut Local Authorization GB0441 01 GB0749 00 a For details on My Panel refer to My Panel on page 9 34 9 36 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Local Authorization 10 10 10 10 E mail Address Access Level Administrator Printer My Panel Local Authorization Cancel FAX Transmission Can
240. otal Individual Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of pages used Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 59 N Value 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box 9 64 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Unknown Login User Name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown 1 Display the screen Use V or to scroll up and down 10410 lt gt System Menu Counter E A m E rares Booyone Touch Address Book One Touch 2 Fa user toginyob accountng 0 Fa user toginyob accountng 0 Accounting 1 ER Printer System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Settings Job Accounting Settings 3 Unknown ID Job Reject GB0054 03 GB0434 00 2 Select the function 10 10 Permit GB0491 00 a e 9 65 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 9 66 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains the following topics Toner Container Replacement M e Waste Toner Box Replacement cccccecccescceeecceeecucecneceueceucecueecsuesauessuecsae
241. ound during the machine operations Volume Set the buzzer volume level Value O Mute 1 Minimum to 5 Maximum Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are pressed Value Off On Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed Value Off On FAX Reception Only NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Ready Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Value Off On Warning Emit a sound when errors occur Value Off On Key Confirmation USB Keyboard Original Settings Custom Original Size Emit a sound when a key on the optional USB keyboard is pressed Value Off On Description Set up frequently used custom original size The custom size option is displayed on the screen when selecting original size Value Inch models X 1 97 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments Y 1 97 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 50 to 356 mm in 1 mm increments Y 50 to 216 mm in 1 mm increments Default Original Size In the screen for setting the original size select the paper size to be used as the default value Value Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio II others 16K Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Paper Settings Item Custom Paper Size Description Set up f
242. p 1 Display the screen Top Edge on Left 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Orientation Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 jon il Paper Zoom Density Selection A ENS A40 100 Normal 0 m7 um EE I SS Duplex Combine gr Collate 1 sided 1 sided Off On Select the function Ready to copy Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left Select the original orientation 10 10 OK 3 38 GB0001 01 o o ce e eo o a o Ready to copy 10 10 Ce Original Size Xs A4 faz Original Orientation S Top Edge on Left gt C 1 3 Fy Uliginal Image cat Text Photo EcoPrint 6 Off Close Add Edit Shortcul GB0002 00 Use v or AN to scroll up and down Scan to USB Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Duplex o USB Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original Set when using a 1 sided sheet original AEN Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or right Other 1 sided Set when using a 1 sided sheet original Settings 2 sided Binding Left Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or Right right 2 sided Binding Top Set when using a 2 sided sheet o
243. p the machine is operating Turning off the main power switch while the machine is operating may cause it to malfunction In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time A CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If using the products equipped with the fax function note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception Q IMPORTANT Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 12 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library DVD Product Library if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC NOTE Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Wake the device from Sleep before continuing Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 19 Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability WIA driver cannot be installed on Windows XP Installing Printer Driver Ensure the machine is plugged in a
244. p Wizard 3 31 R RA Stateless 11 24 Setup 9 18 Raw Port Protocol Detail 9 19 Rear Cover 2 4 Rear Unit 2 3 Recycled Paper 1 12 11 17 Regarding Trade Names 1 9 Replacing the Maintenance Kit 10 6 Report Print 9 5 Accounting Report 9 6 Font List 9 5 Network Status 9 5 Service Status 9 6 Status Page 9 5 Resolution 9 17 11 19 11 20 Restart 9 4 Result Report Settings 9 6 S Safety Conventions in This Guide 1 2 Scan Resolution 3 46 Secure Protocol 9 21 Send as E mail 6 2 11 24 E mail Subject Body 6 40 sending 6 1 Preparation for Sending a Document toa PC 6 5 Send as E mail 6 2 Send to Folder SMB FTP 6 2 sending E mail 2 22 Sending Size 6 37 Send Settings Color TIFF Compression 9 14 Default Screen 9 14 Dest Check before Send 9 14 Entry Check for New Dest 9 14 Send and Forward 9 14 Serial Number 3 15 Sharpness 3 48 Shortcuts Editing and Deleting 3 29 Registering 3 27 Using 3 30 Simple Login 3 18 Sleep 2 19 Slit Glass 2 2 SMB Client Transmission Protocol Detail 9 19 SMTP 11 25 SMTP E mail TX Protocol Detail 9 19 SNMP Protocol Detail 9 19 SNMP v3 Protocol Detail 9 19 solving Malfunctions 10 10 Sound 9 9 Specifications Document Processor 11 21 Environmental Specifications 11 21 Machine 11 18 Printer 11 20 Scanner 11 20 Status Job Cancel 8 1 otatus Page 11 25 Storing Size 7 14 Subnet Mask 11 25 Setup 9 17 Symbols 1 2 System Menu 9 2 T TCP IP 11 25 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 9 17 TCP IP IPv6 11 25 S
245. page 3 54 Encrypt your message FTP Encrypted TX gt page 6 41 Send a image to a WSD compatible computer NOTE WSD Scan P page 6 42 This section does not include fax settings For details on fax operation refer to the FAX Operation Guide Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability 6 36 sending gt Sending Functions Sending Size Select size of image to be sent Same as Original Size Automatically sends the same size as the original Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio Il Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 or Youkei 2 Relationship between Original Size Sending Size and Zoom Original Size page 3 37 Sending Size and Zoom page 3 50 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to the same different send as are Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Sending Size Select Same as Original Select the required size Zoom Select 100 or Auto Select Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual size No Zoom 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2
246. page 7 14 and Zoom are related to each other Refer to Sending Size on page 6 37 and Storing Size on page 7 14 1 2 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest Check i FAX TX Resolution Recall j Vm dpi 200x100dpi Normal gm Zoom Nc 100 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book E 4 6 Continuous Scan G lt GB0055_00 1 2 ad Off h a File Name Entry v E mail Folder FAX doc z Functions vv Favorites Close Add Edi _ Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0081 03 Press Functions and then Zoom Select the function 10 10 100 Auto L7 NE e GB0087 00 3 50 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions File Format o USB opecify the image file format In addition you can adjust the image quality level PDF Saves or sends a PDF file You can specify the format that comply with PDF A TIFF Saves or sends a TIFF file JPEG Saves or sends a JPEG file Each page will be saved individually XPS Saves or sends a file in XPS Others File Format Select from PDF TIFF JPEG and XPS Image Quality Set the image quality from 1 to 5 Low Quality High Quality PDF A Set PDF A from PDF A 1a and PDF A 1b This setting is displayed only when PDF has been sele
247. paper MEE d dE nuni P Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops Q IMPORTANT Curled paper must be uncurled before use Do not load paper above the triangle mark located on the width guide If the paper is considerably curled in one direction for example if the paper is already printed on one side try to roll the paper in the opposite direction to counteract the curl Printed sheets will then come out flat 3 Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray Refer to Quick Setup Wizard on page 3 31 3 8 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Envelopes 5 envelope may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows Acceptable Envelope Hagaki 148 x 100 mm Oufuku Hagaki 148 x 200 mm Youkei 2 162 x 114 mm Youkei 4 235 x 105 mm Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Executive 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 ISO B5 176 x 250 mm To print on envelopes press the envelope switch in the rear unit to change to envelope mode 1 Open the rear cover 3 9 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 2 Press the envelope switches green
248. pendix gt Paper Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser printers It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details Criteria Specifications Weight Cassettes 60 to 120 g m Multi purpose tray 60 to 220 g m Thickness 0 086 to 0 230 mm Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 Moisture content 4 to 6 Grain direction Long grain paper supply direction Pulp content 8096 or more NOTE Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of pap
249. perations press Keyboard to enter the login user name The name can also be entered using the numeric keypad GB0723 00 GB0057 00 t Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 2 Enter the login password 4000 Input Input 4 Limit 64 Limit 4 v ABC a A q w e r t y u fe p a S d f g h j k Z X C V b 4 m Press Password to enter the login password GB0057 00 GB0057 01 Common Operations gt Login Logout 3 Log in 10 10 Login User Name i Login Password KK Keyboard NOTE If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination o he N N gt m o Simple Login Select the user to login 10 10 lt GB0023_00 If this screen is displayed during operations select a user and log in NOTE If a user password is required an input screen will be displayed Refer to Simple Login on page 9 38 Logout To logout from the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name password entry screen Logout Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances e When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key e When the Auto Sleep function is activated e When the auto panel reset function is activated 3 18 Common Operations gt Favorites Favorites Frequently used funct
250. printing services NetWare Novell s network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems PDF A This is ISO 19005 1 Document management Electronic document file format for long term preservation Part 1 Use of PDF PDF A and is a file format based on PDF 1 4 It has been standardized as ISO 19005 1 and is a specialization of PDF which has been mainly used for printing for long term storage A new part ISO 19005 2 PDF A 2 is currently being prepared POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA State
251. r 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings Local User Authorization off Enabling Disabling User Login Administration P page 9 27 X Adding a User gt page 9 29 Local User Authorization gt page 9 33 Editing and Deleting Users gt page 9 35 Simple Login gt page 9 38 Group Authorization gt page 9 44 Obtain Network User Property gt page 9 48 GB0435 00 9 26 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization Off GB0435_00 2 Select the authentication method 10 10 Local Authentication Network Authentication gt L7 NN e When selecting Network Authentication GB0436_00 Select the server type 10 10 10 10 Server Type Kerberos Host Name Domain Name 2
252. red Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 5 Enter the address number Ready to send 10 10 10 10 Name Support department 1 Address Number Auto Member Member 0 000 250 1 1 GB0217 01 Cancel E GB0420 02 d Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 6 Select the members destinations 1 Display the screen 10 10 Ready to send Name Support department Address Number Auto 1 mese j 1 1 Member Member 0 2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box Ready to send 10 10 Address Book Contact Iv Na 001 i Sales departrient 1 0123456 e N m EU Qa e t GB0114 03 GB0420 02 Searches by destination name Advanced search by type of registered destination E 001 Sales department 1 ab 3 nbn Ju mail Folder SMB FTP or FAX WA 002 gt Support department 0234567 caw __ 002 p Support department BOX Vv Use VM or AN to scroll up and down GB0428 01 e Displays details for individual des
253. requently used custom paper size The custom size option is displayed on the screen when selecting paper size Value Inch models Cassette 1 size X 4 13 to 8 50 Y 5 83 to 14 02 Cassette 2 to 4 size X 5 83 to 8 50 Y 8 27 to 14 02 MP tray size X 2 76 to 8 50 Y 5 83 to 14 02 Metric models Cassette 1 size X 105 to 216 mm Y 148 to 356 mm Cassette 2 to 4 size X 148 to 216 mm Y 210 to 356 mm MP tray size X 70 to 216 mm Y 148 to 356 mm Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed For details refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 11 Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 4 and multi purpose tray Value Cassette 1 to 4 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Selection Set the default paper selection Value Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source Media for Auto B amp W Select a default media type for auto paper selection when Auto is selected of Paper Selection If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size Value All Media Types Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunch
254. ress Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book NOTE For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 6 24 For details on the External Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen 2 10 10 Dest Recall ns One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book le lt a is Nn E mail Folder FAX S GB0055 00 2 Select the destination Address Book All DA EI 123456 123456 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down fod 123456 123 456789 c0 1 1 Jod 123456 12345 com f f f t fodi yee 123456 11111 com Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box o o Ke N o a o d 6 15 sending gt Specifying Destination Destination Search 10 10 Address Book All Y Q Searches by destination name NAT 123456 123456 e Advanced search by type of registered destination E joo YS 125456 12304567890 E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group oo3 123456 12345 com a joo4 i 123456 11111 com a GB0426_00 Enk el
255. riginal that will be bound at the top Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction This function is displayed when 2 sided Binding Left Right or 2 sided Binding Top is selected 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen Send Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest Q Recall Check File Format Se ae 3 Original Size One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book m q Original Orientation ER um m ee E Ton bse mi lel lt Ww Duplex E mail Folder FAX 7v e 1 sided Vv M GB0055_00 GB0081_00 Close Add Edit BENE Use V or A to scroll up and down Scan to USB 10 10 EMEN Ga File Format PDF Scan Resolution f300x300dpi all Density L File Name smod abf Entry Normal 0 doc s Functions Cancel GB0096 00 3 39 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the type of original 2 sided Ready to send 10 10 ieee gt 1 sided 2 sided Others NE d GB0013 00 Others 1 10 10 1 sided 2 sided Others NE 2 Select the type of original GB0013 00 Ready to send 10 10 Duplex 1 sided EX 2 sided Binding Left Right 1 1 Ey 2 sided Binding Top d e Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0014
256. rint Job Log Copy Send Job Log FAX Printer Folder SMB FTP FAX reception E mail E mail reception Application Printing from Document Box Mixed Multiple destination Job Report List Store Job Log Scan Printing data from removable FAX memory Printer Application NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status Job Cancel Fees 02 Bes Job Log gt 2 4 Psoe Job Log 1 fisco Waiting V4 Pause All Print Jobs GB0052 01 Use v or A to scroll up and down Press either of Print Job Log Send Job Log or Store Job Log to check the log 2 Check the log Status Job Cancel 10 10 0011 doc0000112010081817 Completed OK 0010 doc0000102010081815 amp Canceled 7 1 3 0009 55d0c0000092010081815 amp Completed 5 0008 doc Error EB V GB0186 00 Displays details for individual jobs Press Close to exit the screen NOTE The job history can be sent by E mail For details refer to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 N Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Sending the Log History You can send the log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached NOTE To send the log history by e mail select On of the SMTP settings on the COMMAND CEN
257. rint from User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Email can be sent to a single destination 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Job Finish Notice 10 10 10 10 Copies Lr c cc Paper LOW Zoom ED vensity 0 Selection Background Density Adj A4 J 1100 Normal 0 AA p um EEEEEES ERER E EHE gg Continuous Scan 2 Duplex Combine gj Collate pe 4 gu s Job Finish Notice i sided gt 1 sided Off On e GB0001 01 GB0002 01 Close Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 Ready to copy 12 7 9 4 Cancel Back d GB0063 00 GB0938 00 3 Select the destination Select an e mail address from the address book Searches by destination name Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Q Address Book aaa abc com E Ext Address Book 1 bbb abc com 1 1 Address Entry ccc abc com Qa ddd abc com Qu m 2 My Address gt el GB0064_00 GB0398_00 Allows you to search for and sort destinations Displays details for individual destinations Common Operations gt Using Va
258. rinting or deleting data from the Document box When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses C Error Message Cannot connect to Authentication Server Checkpoints Corrective Actions Set machine time to match the server s time Reference Page Reference Page Check the domain name Check the host name 10 13 Check the connection status with the server Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot duplex print on the Did you select a paper size type Press Paper Selection to select the following paper that cannot be duplex printed available paper Press Continue to print without using Duplex function Cannot print the specified Only one copy is available due to number of copies processing too many jobs in parallel Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Cannot process this job This job is canceled because it is restricted by User Authorization or Job Accounting Press End Cassette is not installed Cannot feed paper Set the cassette indicated on the touch panel Check the envelope switch Does the position of the left Match the position of the left and right envelope switch match the right envelope switches envelope switch Does
259. rious Functions 4 Select the e mail address from an external address book 10 10 bal Address Book E Ext Address Book 1 1 Address Entry gt 2 My Address d For details on the External Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide GB0064 00 Enter the e mail address directly Ready to copy 10 10 T Address Book Input 11 Limit 128 KL Ext Address Book 4 gt 1 1 Address Entry z My Address GB0064 00 e Up to 128 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters Uses the e mail address of the logged in user Ready to copy 10 10 TS Address Book E Ext Address Book 1 1 1 a Address Entry gt 2 My Address GB0064 00 Cancel Back Next This setting is displayed when using user login administration Accept the destinations Press OK GB0057 05 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions File Name Entry Add a file name Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 35 display the screen Copy Send Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 l l Copies 1 i gt Hl pecca EE ed File Name Entry Paper Zoom ii Density I do
260. roperty from the LDAP server Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method and NTLM or Kerberos must be selected as the server type in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 9 27 Server Name Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address up to 64 characters Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389 Name 1 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Name 2 E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address from the LDAP server up to 128 characters Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds from 5 to 255 seconds If using Active Directory of Windows the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication If using Active Directory of Windows displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1 Name 2 can be left out When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2 and if the value of displayName is Mike Smith and the value of department is Sales in Active Directory of Windows the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales If using Active Directory of Windows mail of Attribute may be used as E mail Address 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 On gt J 1 1
261. rotocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 11 23 Appendix gt Glossary Multi Purpose MP Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and
262. rs in a directory exceeds 100 you will be unable to save additional documents 5 Select the functions Ready to store in Box 10 10 1 ge 3 m uuu NENNEN Ta File Duplex Scan T Format L9 Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi m NNNM Density Le File Name an ab Ben Normal 0 doc Select the function to use for Document Box GB0096 00 Press Functions to display other functions 7 6 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB For details refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7 9 6 Start storing Start Press the Start key to start storing Remove the USB memory For details refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7 8 N 1 1 Document Box gt Removing USB Memory Removing USB Memory Certain operations must be performed on the screen before USB memory can be removed Q IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory 4 Display the screen 10 10 DoumentBox ssi Box Document Job Box En Memo 1 1 1 Sub Address Box Address Box Polling Box Box GB0051 00 2 Select Remove Memory Use VV or AN to scroll up and down 10 10 i ABC BB DEF gt 1 1 25 gt GHI gt Sort Name Coed x gt Vv Sort Date and Time Close a 3 Remove the USB memory ww AY NN NN N NN NN N NN N GB0107_01 After R
263. ry Documents 5 10 Private Print 5 5 Proof and Hold 5 7 Job Finish Notice 3 54 JPEG TIFF Print 7 12 K Keyboard Layout 9 13 KPDL 11 23 L Label 11 15 Language 9 5 LAN Interface 9 21 LDAP Protocol Detail 9 19 LDAP Security 9 21 Left Cover 2 4 Legal Information 1 9 Legal Restriction on Copying 1 8 Legal Restriction on Scanning 1 8 LINE Connector 2 4 Index 2 Login 3 17 9 54 Logout 3 18 9 54 LPD Protocol Detail 9 19 M Machine Setup Wizard 2 20 Main Power Switch 2 4 Manual Setting IPv6 9 18 Measurement 9 13 Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 11 Multi Purpose Tray 2 3 11 24 Loading Paper 3 7 Paper Size and Media Type 3 31 9 8 Multi Sending 6 23 N NetBEUI 11 24 Protocol Detail 9 19 NetWare 11 24 Setup 9 20 Network Preparing 2 Setup 2 20 9 17 Network Cable Connecting 2 9 Network Interface 2 8 Network Interface Connector 2 4 Network Interface Indicators 2 4 O One Touch Key 6 33 Adding a Destination 6 33 Editing and Deleting 6 35 Open SSL License 1 9 Operation Panel 2 2 2 5 Option Card Authentication Kit 11 4 Expansion Memory 11 3 Overview 11 2 Paper Feeder 11 2 Optional Function 11 5 Optional Memory 9 22 Option Interface Slot 2 4 Original Eject Table 2 4 Original Image 3 47 Original Orientation 3 38 Originals Custom Original Size 9 9 Default Original Size 9 9 Loading Originals 3 12 Original Size 3 37 Original Size 3 37 Original SSLeay License 1 10 Original Stopper 2 4 Original Table 2 4
264. s Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Available Operating System Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 11 20 Appendix gt Specifications Document Processor Original Feed Method Description Automatic feed Supported Original Types Sheet originals Paper Size Maximum Legal A4 Minimum Statement A5 Paper Weight Simplex 50 to 120 g m Duplex 50 to 110 g m Loading Capacity 50 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Environmental Specifications Time to Sleep mode default setting Description 1 minute Recovery time from Sleep mode 15 seconds or less Duplexing Standard Paper supply capability NOTE 100 recycled paper may be used Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types EN ISO 7779 Der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779 EK1 ITB 2000 Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden 11 21 Appendix gt Glossary Glossary AppleTalk AppleTalk which comes with Apple Computer s Mac OS is a network protocol AppleTalk enables file printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto For
265. sa EE RUPEE Etro Meister PIMIR Pepe E E 3 48 Background Densi AJUST e c 3 49 Z O c E ce E N E E E E E N E E S 3 50 PEF ONNO oera a E E E E E 3 51 Gelee Lea p A a EE E E A ET E E E O E E A E 3 53 JOD EI ANOU E qm t 3 54 PENAS ENN aer E 3 56 POTE O a E E EENE E E AE EEEE 3 57 3 1 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Optional Equipment on page 11 2 Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps 1 3 IN A M N CLAW y e AS nd ad 2 4 R M ARN 2 p 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers 4 Finally align the papers on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam Q IMPORTANT If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality NOTE If printouts are curled turn the stack in the cassette upside down If you use special paper
266. screen Ready to send l 10 10 ant l Dest 0 Recall Sises One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book m i E mail Folder FAX V A A Functions Favorites GB0055 00 Enter destination E mail address Input 11 Limit 128 GB0057 07 Up to 128 characters can be entered N To enter multiple destinations press Next Destination and enter the next destination Up to 100 E mail addresses can be specified Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters You can register the entered email address in the Address Book by pressing Menu and then Add to Address Book You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination Accept the destinations abc def com Input 1 Limit 128 QO Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 N 6 18 sending gt Specifying Destination Specifying a New PC Folder Specify either the desired shared folder on a computer or an FTP server as the destination NOTE Refer to Creating a Shared Folder on page 6 7 for details on how to share a folder Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 scil Dest 0 Check Recall One Touch
267. se applications for a limited period on a trial basis UG 33 ThinPrint This application can only be activated in Europe This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver NOTE Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the application Starting Application Use Use the procedure below to start using an application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 for the default login user name and password 4 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down 1010 lt gt System Menu Counter gt dE 1 Date Timer 2 5 5 1 T Adjustment VS HE VS ev Vana Optional Function THA 10 10 GB0054 04 GB0511 01 2 Start using an application 1 Select the desired application and press Activate 10 10 CARD AUTHENTICA GB0557 00 2 Displays details for individual applications Appendix gt Optional Equipment 2 Select Official and enter the license key using the numeric keys 10 10 10 10 Official 1 1 2 d 4 i Il e GB0608 00 GB0609 00 J Some applications do not require you to enter a license key To use the application as a tri
268. se envelopes with exposed adhesive In addition do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine Donotuse envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window e f paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 In addition the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surfa
269. sist with transmission speed and security issues To use the transmission function verify the following Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine Use COMMAND CENTER the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys e Create a share folder in the destination computer when a folder SMB FTP is selected as the destination Consult your network administrator concerning destination folder sharing settings Basic Sending Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 6 18 Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC page 6 19 Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server page 6 19 Pac inm Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program page 6 45 NOTE Different sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 6 23 This function can only be used on products equipped with fax capability For details about this function refer to the FAX Operation Guide 6 2 Sending gt Basic Operation 1 Press the Send key Send NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for
270. smission NOTE To use FTP encryption set SSL to On in the Secure Protocol settings For details refer to Secure Protocol on page 9 27 4 Display the screen 2 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Ser l o Des O0 r Recall Check eb E mail Subject Body a oe Job Finish Notice One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book ad r f FAX a Iransmission E mail Folder FAX wv 5 E e o j y Favorites B Add Edi a Shortcut a Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the function Ready to send 10 10 F L7 NN L d GB0091 00 6 41 Sending gt WSD Scan WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE To use WSD Scan confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network connected and WSD Scan page 9 20 is set to On in the network settings For information on operating the computer refer to the computer s help or the operation guide of your software Installing Driver Software for Windows 7 4 Display the window From the Start menu select Network 2 Install the driver Right click the machine s icon and then click Install NOTE If the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears
271. solution Fit the image size to the print resolution Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 Copies u o md t ON Job Finish Notice oe 73 Off q Paper ggz Collate Duplex Selection l al Priority Override A4 D On 1 sided I1 Off p em Encrypted PDF Password 2 d Off d JPEG TIFF Print dpi Paper Size Close dd Edi Shortcut _ Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0097 00 GB0099 00 Cancel Select the function Ready to print from Box 10 10 mn E Paper Size Image Resolution Print Resolution GB0101 00 L7 NN 1 12 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 Prir m Copies h en wf 2 gs Fit to Page w Paper gg Collate Duplex Selection LJ On LZ A4 D 1 sided Add Edi Shortcut GB0097 00 GB0099 01 Cancel Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 zu E el GB0102_00 Document Box
272. specified destinations ma 1 Display the screen Referring to Sending the Log History on Send the log history 2 System Menu Counter Send Log History Auto Sending 10 10 Destination E mail Job Log Subject GB0578 00 8 10 nually page 8 8 display the screen 2 gt Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Setting E mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E mail 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Send Log History Auto Sending Off Destination Job Log Subject GB0578 00 2 Enter an E mail subject Inputs l 1 Limit 60 GB0057 23 Up to 60 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 8 11 Status Job Cancel gt Check of Device Status Check of Device Status Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status Status Job Cancel um EM mM lA Send Job Log lis Job Log Print Jobs Status Job Cancel SS prs Running FAX Waiting 2 4 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 1 GB0052 01 gt EE C2 A Toner Status 2 OK rene Status No Paper Pause All Pr
273. ss Book Address Book i a Scan Resolution 2 uL S dpi 300x300dpi To Density E mail Folder Vv gt Um Normal 0 Folder AX o e l j Favorites B Close Add Edi HE Shea a J Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 off S am dE 6 39 GB0081 01 sending gt Sending Functions E mail Subject Body Add subject and body when sending a document NOTE The subject can include up to 60 characters and the body can include up to 500 characters 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen SIE 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 5 Des 0 Recall Check E mail Subject Body One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book ae s S 1 2 p amp FTP Encrypted TX FAX Delayed Transmission E mail Folder FAX V a u or fV Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0055 00 GB0081 04 2 Enter the subject 3 Ready to send 10 10 Input Body 1 L7 NEN d GB0088 00 GB0057 19 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Enter the body Ready to send 10 10 Inputs i f Limit 500 Subject Meeting 1 Body GB0088 01 GB0057 20 Cancel OK t 4 Press OK 6 40 sending gt Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX Encrypt images when using FTP Encryption secures the document tran
274. stem on page 9 17 2 20 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security network printing E mail transmission and advanced networking NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 1 Launch your Web browser 2 Inthe Address or Location bar enter the machine s IP address E g http 192 168 48 21 The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their current status 2 Configure the function Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The values for each category must be set separately If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER enter a password to access pages other than the startup page The default password is adminOO The password can be changed For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 2 21 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail Sending E mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments To use this function this machine must be connected to a ma
275. such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo or company name refer to Paper on page 11 10 Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 3 2 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper The standard cassette holds up to 500 sheets of plain paper 80 g m The following paper sizes are supported A4 A5 A6 B5 Legal Letter Other Folio Oficio Il Executive Statement 16K and Envelope C5 NOTE You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Media Type on page 9 7 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 120 g m Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 120 g m If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removi
276. sults 9 39 GB0712 00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Network user 10 10 Input Limit64 Login User Name Keyboard Login Password Keyboard e S e Cancel Back Next 3 af s d 5 0 System Menu Counter 10 10 Input 3 Limit 64 Login User Name Keyboard abc Login Password Keyboard l GB0704 01 System Menu Counter Login User Name Login Password KK iy d GB0704 02 Enter the Login User Name and Login Password 3 Enter the login user name to use with simple login Input B n 1 Limit 32 GB0057 32 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Name System Menu Counter 10 10 V Input B Limit 32 User User A Password Login Off Icon Male 1 e GB0645 00 GB0057 62 9 40 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 4 User System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Local User Password Login 2 i o e o O Si d E a E 1 fo Select the user to use for simple logins from Local User or Network User Password Login System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 off User User af On d 1 1 Password Login Off 2 Icon Male 1 i o e O 4 E d E S 0 ls Qo Icon System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 I 290 P id 2 Lye
277. t System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total O Scan Others ff off Cancel 9 56 10 10 10 10 GB0480_00 GB0480 00 GB0480 01 GB0480 00 GB0480 00 Input 8 Limit 32 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters System Menu Counter 0 99999999 00000001 2 OO System Menu Counter Off Counter Limit Reject Usage 2 Use V or AN to scroll up and down For details refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 59 10 10 10 10 7 NEP el it GB0057 64 GB0476 00 e e m N e a o Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Editing and Deleting Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 52 display the screen 2 DeTdaull Setting gt GB0461_01 2 Edit or delete an account To edit an account 1 Press for the account name you wish to edit Q M 10 10 Searches by account name P i 1 fit Sales department 00000001 1 GB0473_00 e Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results You can specify an account name by account ID by pressing the Quick No Search key 2 Editthe account Account Name 10 10 2 Input
278. t System Menu Drum Refresh Description Perform Drum Refresh when images show streaking with white lines Takes about 90 seconds Press Start to perform Drum Refresh NOTE Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done Auto Drum Refresh Auto Drum Refresh may be executed when the machine is turned on the power or recovered from the low power mode or sleep mode Auto Drum Refresh is executed automatically to keep the best image quality by monitoring its peripheral temperature and humidity Value Off Do not perform Auto Drum Refresh Standard Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard maximum 360 seconds Long Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long maximum 450 seconds NOTE When an error state such as condensation is detected Normal and Long may take a maximum of 630 seconds f you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key 9 24 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to login Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for th
279. t first be registered in the Address Book Register one or more destinations as needed before proceeding 4 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down d gt System Menu Counter mm a E Address Book One Touch 4 5 L z User Login Job Accounting l E Printer VY System Menu Counter Address Book gt 1 GB0054 03 10 10 gt One Touch Key Address Book Defaults gt Print List gt GB0411_00 2 Adds a One Touch Key 002 None 1 003 None 005 None 006 None 008 None 009 None 011 None 012 None Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination and press lt GB0422_00 3 Select the destinations i Address Book All Iva Searches by destination name fig Sales department 1 0123456 cm Advanced search by type of registered destination E Sales department 1 abc em gt i2 mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Support department 0234567 QA E support department BOX e Nw Use V or A to scroll up and down Displays details for individual destinations GB0429 00 Select one destination contact or group from the Address Book You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key 6 33 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key 5 You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search Address Book All System Menu Count
280. tering characters N 4 Confirm the information Check the information Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question Ready to send 10 10 Host Name Use V or AN to scroll up and down Login User Name Cancel GB0128 00 When specifying a computer or server port number as the destination press Port and enter the port number You can enter a number from 1 to 65 535 with a maximum of 5 digits Confirm the connection status 10 10 qu LLLA LAE 10 10 Host Name abc Connection Test Path abc Next Destination 2 Port 139 gt Add to Address Book Login User Name abc Menu Cancel Close GB0128 00 GB0020 00 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry To enter multiple destinations press Next Destination and enter the next destination You can specify a combined total of up to 5 FTP and SMB destination folders You can register the entered information in the Address Book by pressing Menu and then Add to Address Book 6 20 sending gt Specifying Destination 5 Accept the destinations Ready to send 10 10 Host Name abc Menu Cancel O Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 o o co N o a o 6 21 sending gt Specifying Destination Checking and Editing Destinations Check and edit a selected d
281. the cut out part with the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle Q IMPORTANT Before inserting a memory module in the machine make sure that the machine is switched off 3 Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine 4 Reinstall the covers Removing the Memory Module To remove a memory module remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine Then carefully push out the two socket clamps Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove Verifying the Expanded Memory To verify that the memory module is working properly test it by printing a status page Refer to Report on page 9 5 N Card Authentication Kit User login administration can be performed using IC cards To do so it is necessary to register IC card information on the previously registered local user list For more information about how to register this information refer to the C Card Authentication Kit Operation Guide USB Keyboard A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one Appendix gt Optional Equipment Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine You can use the
282. the following topics aiununepiTs sisse db 5 2 Printing Data Saved on the Printer cccccccccseccccsseeeceesceceeseeceeeecseueecseaeessueeecsueeeesaueeesueesssageeessueeesseneeesagees 5 5 PEVAR INT oera a E E E A EE E E E 5 5 FOOT eA FOR P 5 7 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents 5 1 Printing gt Printing from Applications Printing from Applications This section provides basic instructions for printing documents Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 You can print documents created on your computer once you install the printer driver from the included DVD Product Library Refer to nstalling Software on page 2 13 N For more information about how to configure advanced printer driver settings and print documents refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on the DVD 1 Display the window r T Adobe Reader Edit View Document Tools Window Help L Open Ctrl O 103 E x Find M V Create Adobe PDF Using Acrobat com il Collaborate gt Save a Copy Shift Ctrl S Save as Text Attach to Email Close Ctrl W Properties Ctrl D Digital Editions Drint Cetin Chifts Ctrl D H Print cup TUS HEHHHHHEHHHHHHERHBEN ee TT TT oe eG I PI PI RS P D DB Click File and select Print in the application 2 Configure the printer
283. the total for both You can use by Combine to check the number of pages used in Combine None mode Combine 2 in 1 mode Combine 4 in 1 mode and the total for all three Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX Transmission Time Displays the total duration of fax transmissions FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 52 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting Print Accounting Report Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461 02 To count the number of pages for all account select Total Job Accounting To count the number of pages by account select Each Job Accounting Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 Q m Sales department 100000001 a Others m a GB0469_00 Menu Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results it To count the number of pages by account name press for the account name whose usage you wish to view 9 61 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 2 View the number of pages System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Copy Total wao 111 Printe
284. tinations You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key 6 29 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search Ready to send 10 10 Address Book Contact E 001 i Sales department 1 0123456 001 Sales department 1 abc WA 002 B Support department 0234567 c J002 E Support department BOX em VY E E rad e o e A T GB0428 01 p R 10 10 Narrow Down Search Name Search No Sort Name GB0396 00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP or FAX Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number NOTE To cancel a selection press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark 7 Accept the members Ready to send 10 10 Address Book Contact ly Q Y 001 fia Sales department 1 0123456 001 Sales department 1 abc am 1 1 2 vA 002 Support department 0234567 J002 I E Support department B EE 21x v GB0428_01 Eo Cancel rer 8 Register the group 10 10 Name Support department Address Number Auto Member Member 2 Cancel GB0420 03 er ait
285. ting the Power Cable cccccscccssccescceseecueceucecacecseeceusceeecueecseesauessensaaes 2 10 FOO OI M Ot 2 11 xol M H 2 11 x29 e m 2 11 PTV CAIN FNC eere qu Tz IS P OO E Omm 2 13 Installing Printer Driver lseeesesseseseeeeeee nennen nnnm nnn nnns 2 13 Setting R27 NU cc 2 17 Seting WIA DIVEN T aaneae 2 18 Energy saver TUNG Oll sacacasa a Ei T nea ese ade e aan aes aed coda EE aR 2 19 Sleep and Auto Sleep 0 cecccecccsscceecceseecneecuceceeeceueceueceueecaeesaeeceueesueesueesaeessensaass 2 19 Machine Setup Wizard 2 20 COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail 2 0 0 0 ccccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseneeseeeesees 2 21 SCRAN IVAN M Access 2 22 3 Common Operations sssvsscscscsscesenscecsessscpacstannsncsceeneannsscestwandeswenanaussteneaenies 3 1 Kerisi aeiae e ae 3 2 Before Loading Paper ccccccscccssccesceceeeceueceucecseecueeceueecaeesaeessueesueesaeesaeeeseeesaeesaass 3 2 Loading Paper in the Cassettes ccccccccecccsecceseeeseeceeecececeueceeeesaeesseeseeesaueeseeeseeees 3 3 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray cccccccecccseccseeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeseeeaeeeseeeeaees 3 7 LO AGING deni Nm 3 12 Placing Originals on the Platen
286. tion Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Value 1 to 999 copies Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Error Handling Description Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type Value 1 sided Printed in 1 sided Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi purpose tray Value Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Measurement Item Description Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Value mm Inch Keyboard Layout Item Description Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters Value QWERTY QWERTZ AZERTY USB Keyboard Type Item Description USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use Value US English US English with Euro Copy Configures settings for copying functions Description Auto Paper Selection If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes Value Most Suitable Size Select paper based o
287. tion at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt page 3 46 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 45 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 56 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 37 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 38 Change the size at which to store an image Storing Size gt page 7 14 Change the color mode for images being stored Color Selection page 3 53 Select original image type for best results Original Image page 3 47 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness gt page 3 48 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 49 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the storing size Zoom page 3 50 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan page 3 41 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 54 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Duplex Print a document 1 sided or 2 sided Select the original binding orientation and desired final binding orientation R aA 2 sided Print a 2 sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left or right 2 sided Print a 2 sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly
288. to Copying Functions on page 4 4 ee Mre s Duplex QD Combine Collate L ap 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On GB0001 01 4 Entering the copy quantity NOTE Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity 4 2 Copying gt Basic Operation 5 Start copying Sta rt Press the Start key to start copying Copying gt Copying Functions Copying Functions Copy screen shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use v or A to select the function What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Reference Page Paper Selection f page 3 43 Reduce or enlarge the original Zoom page 4 5 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 45 Copy on both sides of the paper Duplex page 4 7 Combine 2 or 4 originals into 1 sheet Combine 9 page 4 10 Collate the output documents in page order Collate gt page 3 44 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 37 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 38 Select original image type for best results Original Image page 3 47 Save toner when printing EcoPrint gt page 4 13 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness 5 page 3 48 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or
289. trator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Signature Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Domain Restriction 3 Click Submit Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters You can also specify E mail addresses 2 23 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail 2 24 3 Common Operations This chapter explains the following topics LO AGING AIDCM Em omm 3 2 Belgro Loading Paper sete csciersemteasedatte neue 3 2 Loading Paper in the CaSSCUCS ccavesnsarcsnecaeansvarkvannedanienuduatuveadaannoniaeweianuetadeiabuevacieadeeedautdanielsaaacsnaieem 3 3 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ccc eccccccccecceeeece eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeesseeeseeeseeesseeeseeseeeaeeeees 3 7 Wortes lae Ri UNES 3 12 Placing Originals on the Platen uuuussacue cocupa eerta Rue md audiit Rita sarta b ieu Ricardo f tnr ur 3 12 Loading Originals in the Document Processor seesssssssssssssssseeeeene nennen nennen nennen 3 13 Checking the
290. tton in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about Click the item you want to know about and press the F1 key on your keyboard 5 4 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Printing Data Saved on the Printer Print data can be saved in the machine s Job Box and printed when needed Private Print Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print Refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver NOTE RAM disk mode must be enabled For details refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9 22 N 1 Display the screen Document Box Removable Memory Sub Address Box GBO0051 00 Proof and Hold GB0650 00 2 Select the creator of the document to print 10 10 Cancel Back GB0651 00 t 3 Select the document im y Vi 3 doc 4100908135138 c l _ amp jdoc 0100908134821 10 10 1 1 ad J Cancel GB0653 01 Displays details for individual documents 5 5 _ mE e Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer 4 Print and delete the document To print the document 1 10 10 ti Vi FS doc 4100908135138 c _ amp jdoc 0100908134821 1 1 ad m NOTE The password entry screen will be displayed Enter the password using the numeric keys GB0653 01 10 10
291. tware applications and image acquisition devices Preparation before Use gt Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Preparing Necessary Cables Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable Connect a LAN cable to the Printer LAN 10Base T 100Base TX or machine Scanner Send E mail Send SMB Send FTP 1000BASE T Shielded Scanner TWAIN WIA Connect a USB cable to the Printer USB2 0 compatible cable Hi Speed machine Scanner WIA USB compliant Max 5 0 m Shielded Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables Connecting Cables Connecting LAN Cable The equipment can be connected with a network cable and used as a network printer or network scanner 4 Power Off Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the machine 1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on right side of the body 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub 3 Set up the machine Configure the network settings For details refer to Machine Setup Wizard on page 2 20 2 9 Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables Connecting USB Cable The equipment can be connected with a USB cable and used as a printer or scanner in an environment where there is no network 1 Power Off Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the machine 1 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate
292. udes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Orig
293. uments in page order Collate gt page 3 44 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 45 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution P page 3 46 Select original image type for best results Original Image page 3 47 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness gt page 3 48 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 49 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending or storing size Zoom page 3 50 Select the file format for images being sent or stored File Format gt page 3 51 Change the color mode for images being sent or stored Color Selection gt page 3 53 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 54 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry page 3 56 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority 3 36 Priority Override gt page 3 57 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Size 00683 USB Specify the original size to be scanned Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio II Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei
294. unction allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS format 1 Place the originals NW AY Wy jen Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot When the message Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files Are you sure is displayed press Yes Q IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 12 1 5 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 3 Display the screen 10 10 ABC B3 xL When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory screen may appear NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory GB0089 00 4 Select the folder 1010 10 10 L T OO IRENNNNNCN J X 7 9 22PG 1 1 eo o eo e e a Za o 10 10 GB0089 00 Menu Cancel Print Document Box 3 Store File Select All Select the folder where the file will be stored and press Menu and then Store File GB0107 00 The machine will display the top 3 folder levels including the root folder To return to a higher level folder press Back NOTE Up to 100 documents and folders can be displayed for each directory If the number of documents and folde
295. ur own brand It is almost time to replace the toner container Obtain a new toner container Corrective Actions We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine Reference Page Unknown Toner Installed PC Error Message Does the installed toner container s regional specification match the machine s Checkpoints Install the specified container Corrective Actions Reference Page Warning low memory F Job cannot be started Try again later 10 18 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Responding to Send Error Ooo Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 1101 Failed to send the e mail Check the host name of the SMTP server on the COMMAND CENTER 2 22 Failed to send via FTP Check the host name of FTP 6 20 Failed to send via SMB Check the host name of SMB 6 19 1102 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name e Host name e Path 6 20 Failed to send the e mail Check the followings on the COMMAND CENTER e SMTP login user name and login password e POP3 login user name and login password 2 22 Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domai
296. ur packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned DHCP IPv6 DHCP IPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the 11 22 Appendix gt Glossary network DHCP IPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 nod
297. uropean countries Power Consumption Power off 0 1W Options Paper feeder up to 3 units Expansion memory Card Authentication Kit 11 19 Appendix gt Specifications Printer Printing Speed Description Same as Copying Speed First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette 11 5 seconds or less Resolution Fast 1200 600 dpi Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Apple Macintosh OS X Interface USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T Page Description Language Scanner System requirements PRESCRIBE Description CPU 600 Mhz or higher RAM 128 MB or more Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x 400 dpi 200 x 100 dpi Resolution in FAX mode included File Format PDF PDF1 4 PDF A TIFF TIFF V6 TTN2 JPEG XPS Scanning Speed 1 sided B W 35 Images min Color 13 Images min A4 landscape 600 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Interface Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T USB2 0 Hi Speed USB Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission System PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail SMTP Scan to E mail transmission TWAIN scan WIA scan Available Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Window
298. us Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Accounting Report Result Report Settings Send Result Report Prints the accounting report allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered on the machine ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version NOTE You can print the accounting report by logging in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 29 for the default login user name and password Description Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete E mail Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E mail or SMB FTP transmission is complete Value Off On Error Only Canceled before Sending Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent Value Off On Job Finish Notice Setting Sending Log History Attaches sent images to job finish notices Value Do Not Attach Image Attach Image You can send the log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Refer to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information For details on User Login refer to User Login Administration on page 9 25 Descr
299. vailable Set when Adding an Account see page 9 55 or Editing and Deleting Accounts see page 9 57 The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Individual or Total is selected for Copier Printer Count on page 9 64 Restriction Items Individual selected for Copier Printer Count Copy Total Limits the total number of pages used for copying Printer Total Limits the total number of pages used for printing Scan Others Limits the number of pages scanned excludes copying FAX Transmission Limits the number of pages sent by fax FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Total Limits the total number of pages used for copying and printing Scan Others Limits the number of pages scanned excludes copying FAX Transmission Limits the number of pages sent by fax FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Applying Restriction Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 pages Reject Usage Restriction is applied For details on the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction refer to Apply Limit on page 9 64 N 9 59 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 1 Select the item to limit Total selected for
300. x gt Optional Equipment Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine NN ANN A NN NN AU WN WW N Expansion Memory Paper Feeder Paper Feeder Three additional cassettes identical to the machine s cassettes can be installed in the machine Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 Appendix gt Optional Equipment Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed you can plug in optional memory module dual in line memory module in the memory slot provided on the main controller board You can select additional memory module from 256 512 or 1024 MB The maximum memory size is 2048 MB Precautions for Handling the Memory Module Correct Incorrect To protect electronic parts discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe faucet or other large metal object before handling the memory module Or wear an antistatic wrist strap if possible when you install the memory module Installing the Memory Module 1 2 3 Power off Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable Remove the covers Install the memory module 1 Remove the memory module from its package 11 3 Appendix gt Optional Equipment 2 With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket align
301. y 9 44 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration For Group ID specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows If you are using Windows Server 2008 check At tribute Editor tab of user properties If you are using Windows Server 2000 2003 check ADSIEdit ADSIEdit is a support tool in cluded on the installation CD ROM for Windows Server OS under SUPPORT TOOLS FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Kk 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 26 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 2 Group Authorization User Login Network Authentication Local User List Simple login settings 1 1 Group Authorization Set v e o 10 e o a o 1 1 o o 5 10 o a o 2 Enter the group information Group ID 10 10 1 4294967295 1 2 Group Name GB0458_00 Input 1 Limit 128 GB0057 33 Access Level 10 10 Administrator User GB0459 00 el 9 45 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Group ID 10 10 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 1 4294967295 Group Name Group d 1 234567890 Access Level Administrator Printer Off 3 e Group Name e e e
302. y and conduct machine maintenance Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Language Description Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Value English Deutsch Francais Espanol Italiano Nederlands Pyccxunu Portugu s Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured Report Print Item Description Status Page Prints the status page allowing you to check the information including current settings and optional equipment installed Status Page MFP Firmware Version Font List Prints the font list allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine Selection FSET EHEEERI PT Bal EEHHBEEEEREEENIE EHEEENI EHEENNI BEHI EBEHEEEEBEEERE ENHEEEERE PET Baal EEHHEEEEEEEENIE EEEENI EHEENENI BEHEEHEHBEEERIE ALLELE EHEEENI EEHEEHENHEEENE EEEENI EEEEENI EEHBHEEEREEEEENIE EHEEEEENI EHEEENI EEHEEHENHEEENE EEEEEENI EEEEENI EEHEHEEENEEEEENIE EHEHEENEEREENI EHEENNI EEHEHEEBEHEEEENIE ERBEN PE EHEEENENI EHEEENI EHEEENENI EHEEEENI Network Status Prints the network status allowing you to check the information including network address and protocol Network Status Page MFP Firmware Version Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Service Status Description Prints the service status More detailed information is available than on the Stat
303. ying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Precautions for Use Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box avoid inhalation and ingestion as well as contact with your eyes and skin e f you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician e f you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e f you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e ftoner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container a
304. your Service Representative When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses 10 17 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages S Error Message Scanner memory is full Checkpoints Corrective Actions Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the printing job Reference Page Send error An error has occurred during transmission Refer to Responding to Send Error for the error code and corrective actions System error System error has occurred Follow the instructions on the touch panel When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses T Error Message The cover is open Checkpoints Is there any cover which is open Corrective Actions Close the cover indicated on the touch panel Reference Page The phone receiver is off the hook Put down the receiver This memory is not formatted Is the removable memory formatted by this machine Perform Format on this machine Toner is empty Replace the toner container Toner is running out Error Message Unknown Toner Installed Checkpoints Is the installed toner container o
305. ystem Menu Settings system Menu include Item Description Reference Page Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures fax cassette and Energy Saver 3 31 settings Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel 9 5 Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings 9 5 for printing the result reports can also be configured Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned 3 16 User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of 9 7 that information Cassette MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose 9 7 tray Common Settings Configures overall machine operation 9 9 Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen 9 9 Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations 9 9 Original Settings Configures settings for originals 9 9 Paper Settings Configures settings for paper 9 10 Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm up is completed 9 11 or the Reset key is pressed Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier Q IMPORTANT If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key

KYOCERA FS FS-3540MFP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents